Quick guide • Giving guidance for the route quickly 1
• Information to be read before operation Basic function • Setting initial settings before operation 2 • Connecting the Bluetooth® device • Operating the map screen Navigation system • Searching the map 3 • Activating the route guidance Audio/visual • Listening to the radio system • Enjoying music and video 4
Voice command system • Operating the voice command system 5
Information • Operating the weather information screen 6
Peripheral monitoring system • Checking the situation around the vehicle 7
• Operating the phone Phone 8 (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
Lexus Enform • Operating the Lexus Enform 9
Index • Search alphabetically
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Introduction ...... 5 General settings...... 53 Reading this manual...... 7 Voice settings...... 57 Vehicle settings ...... 58 1 Quick guide 3 Navigation system 1-1. Basic function Display and operation switches 3-1. Basic operation ...... 12 Navigation ...... 62 Remote Touch...... 14 Map screen operation...... 64 Menu screen...... 16 Map screen information ...... 67 Status icon...... 18 Traffic information ...... 70 “Setup” screen...... 20 3-2. Destination search Information screen ...... 21 Destination search operation.....72 1-2. Navigation operation Starting route guidance ...... 79 Operating the map screen...... 22 3-3. Route guidance Guiding the route ...... 23 Route guidance screen ...... 83 Registering home...... 24 Typical voice guidance prompts ...... 86 2 Basic function Editing route ...... 87 3-4. Setup 2-1. Basic information before opera- tion Navigation settings ...... 89 Initial screen...... 26 Detailed navigation settings...... 94 How to use the Remote Touch Traffic settings ...... 97 ...... 27 Use of information accumulated by Operating the screen...... 30 navigation system ...... 101 Using side display ...... 32 3-5. Tips for the navigation system Entering letters and numbers/list GPS (Global Positioning System) screen operation...... 34 ...... 102 Linking multi-information display Map database version and covered and the system...... 37 area...... 104 2-2. Connectivity settings 4 Audio/visual system Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® device...... 38 Setting Bluetooth® details ...... 42 4-1. Basic operation Wi-Fi® Hotspot...... 49 Quick reference...... 106 2-3. Other settings Some basics ...... 107
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) TABLE OF CONTENTS 3
4-2. Radio operation SD card ...... 185 1 AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) radio External devices...... 190 ...... 112 Rear-DLNA...... 190 Internet radio ...... 120 Rear-Miracast™...... 193 2 4-3. Media operation 4-9. Rear seat entertainment system CD...... 121 settings DVD...... 123 Rear seat entertainment system 3 USB memory ...... 125 settings ...... 195 iPod...... 127 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat enter- 4 Bluetooth® audio...... 129 tainment system AUX ...... 132 Operating information ...... 198 5 4-4. Audio/visual remote controls 5 Voice command system Steering switches...... 134 Rear Multi Operation Panel.....135 5-1. Voice command system operation 6 4-5. Setup Voice command system ...... 230 Audio settings...... 139 Natural language understanding 7 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual ...... 233 system Command list...... 233 Operating information...... 145 5-2. Mobile Assistant operation 8 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system Mobile Assistant...... 238 features Rear seat entertainment system 6 Information 9 features...... 158 Some basics...... 160 6-1. Information display 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system Receiving weather information operation ...... 242 AM/FM/SXM radio...... 167 Data services settings ...... 244 CD...... 168 Video CD...... 169 7 Peripheral monitoring system
DVD (DVD video and AVCHD™ disc)...... 171 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor Blu-ray Disc™ (BD-Video and Lexus parking assist monitor... 246 BDAV)...... 176 Estimated course line display mode USB memory ...... 181 ...... 249 iPod...... 183 Parking assist guide line display Bluetooth® audio...... 184 mode ...... 250
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Distance guide line display mode Bluetooth® phone ...... 251 message function...... 307 Lexus parking assist monitor pre- 8-2. Setup cautions...... 252 Phone settings...... 312 Things you should know...... 256 8-3. What to do if... 7-2. Panoramic view monitor Troubleshooting...... 321 Panoramic view monitor...... 258 Checking around the vehicle 9 Lexus Enform ...... 264 Checking the front and around the 9-1. Lexus Enform overview vehicle...... 265 Functional overview...... 326 Checking the sides of the vehicle Type A: Function achieved by using ...... 268 a smart phone or DCM...... 327 Checking the rear and around the Type B: Function achieved by using vehicle...... 273 DCM and the system...... 330 When folding the outside rear view Type C: Function achieved by using mirrors ...... 279 DCM...... 331 Magnifying function ...... 280 Type D: Function achieved by using Customizing the panoramic view DCM and a smart phone...... 333 monitor...... 281 9-2. Lexus Enform operation Panoramic view monitor precau- Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 .. 335 tions...... 282 Lexus Enform Destinations...... 338 Things you should know...... 291 9-3. Setup 8 Phone Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 set- tings ...... 340 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free sys- tem for cellular phones) Index Quick reference...... 296 Some basics...... 297 Alphabetical Index ...... 342 Placing a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 300 Receiving a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system ...... 303 Talking on the Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 304
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 5
Introduction vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination. Navigation and multimedia system owner’s manual The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your pres- This manual explains the operation of ent starting location to your destina- the system. Please read this manual tion. The system is also designed to carefully to ensure proper use. Keep direct you to a destination that is unfa- this manual in your vehicle at all times. miliar to you in an efficient manner. The The screens shown in this manual may system uses AISIN AW maps. The cal- differ from the actual screen of the sys- culated routes may not be the shortest tem depending on availability of func- nor the least traffic congested. Your tions, Lexus Enform subscription own personal local knowledge or status, and map data available at the “short cut” may at times be faster than time this manual was produced. the calculated routes. The screens in this manual will also dif- The navigation system’s database fer if the screen theme settings have includes Point of Interest categories to been changed. (Theme setting: allow you to easily select destinations →P.53) such as restaurants and hotels. If a des- In some situations when changing tination is not in the database, you can between screens, it may take longer enter the street address close to it and than normal for the screen to change, the system will guide you there. the screen may be blank momentarily The system will provide both a visual or noise may be displayed. map and audio instructions. The audio Please be aware that the content of this instructions will announce the distance manual may be different from the sys- remaining and the direction to turn in tem in some cases, such as when the when approaching an intersection. system’s software is updated. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyes on the road and are Navigation system (with navigation timed to provide enough time to allow function) you to maneuver, change lanes or slow down. The navigation system is one of the Please be aware that all current vehicle most technologically advanced vehi- navigation systems have certain limita- cle accessories ever developed. The tions that may affect their ability to per- system receives satellite signals from form properly. The accuracy of the the Global Positioning System (GPS) vehicle’s position depends on satellite operated by the U.S. Department of conditions, road configuration, vehicle Defense. Using these signals and other condition or other circumstances. For
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 6 more information on the limitations of the system, refer to page 102. TOYOTA MOTOR CORPORATION
12.3 inch display Free/Open Source Software Informa- tion This product contains Free/Open Source Software (FOSS). The license information and/or the source code of such FOSS can be found at the following URL. http://www.globaldenso.com/en/open source/ivi/toyota/
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7
Reading this manual
Explains symbols used in this man- ual
Symbols in this manual
Symbols Meanings WARNING: Symbols Meanings Explains something that, if Indicates the component not obeyed, could cause or position being death or serious injury to explained. people. Means Do not, Do not do NOTICE: this, or Do not let this hap- Explains something that, if pen. not obeyed, could cause damage to or a malfunc- tion in the vehicle or its Different writing styles for gasoline equipment. and hybrid vehicles Indicates operating or Information for hybrid vehicles is writ- working procedures. Fol- low the steps in numerical ten in brackets next to the information order. for gasoline vehicles. Example Symbols in illustrations Turn the engine switch*1
Safety instruction (without navigation function)
Symbols Meanings To use this system in the safest possible manner, follow all the safety tips shown Indicates the action (push- ing, turning, etc.) used to below. operate switches and Do not use any feature of this system to other devices. the extent it becomes a distraction and
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8 prevents safe driving. The first priority operation of the vehicle. While driving, while driving should always be the safe be sure to observe all traffic regula- operation of the vehicle. While driving, tions. be sure to observe all traffic regula- Prior to the actual use of this system, tions. learn how to use it and become thor- Prior to the actual use of this system, oughly familiar with it. Read the entire learn how to use it and become thor- manual to make sure you understand oughly familiar with it. Read the entire the system. Do not allow other people manual to make sure you understand to use this system until they have read the system. Do not allow other people and understood the instructions in this to use this system until they have read manual. and understood the instructions in this For your safety, some functions may manual. become inoperable when driving. For your safety, some functions may Unavailable screen buttons are become inoperable when driving. dimmed. Unavailable screen buttons are dimmed. WARNING ●For safety, the driver should not oper- WARNING ate the navigation system while he/she is driving. Insufficient attention to the ●For safety, the driver should not oper- road and traffic may cause an acci- ate the system while he/she is driving. dent. Insufficient attention to the road and traffic may cause an accident. ●While driving, be sure to obey the traf- fic regulations and maintain awareness of the road conditions. If a traffic sign Safety instruction (with navigation on the road has been changed, route function) guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a To use this system in the safest possible one way street. manner, follow all the safety tips shown below. While driving, listen to the voice instructions as much as possible and This system is intended to assist in glance at the screen briefly and only reaching the destination and, if used when it is safe. However, do not totally properly, can do so. The driver is solely rely on voice guidance. Use it just for responsible for the safe operation of reference. If the system cannot deter- your vehicle and the safety of your pas- mine the current position correctly, sengers. there is a possibility of incorrect, late, Do not use any feature of this system to or non-voice guidance. the extent it becomes a distraction and The data in the system may occasion- prevents safe driving. The first priority ally be incomplete. Road conditions, while driving should always be the safe including driving restrictions (no left
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9 turns, street closures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore, before following any instructions from the system, look to see whether the instruction can be done safely and legally. This system cannot warn about such things as the safety of an area, condi- tion of streets, and availability of emer- gency services. If unsure about the safety of an area, do not drive into it. Under no circumstances is this system a substitute for the driver’s personal judgement. Use this system only in locations where it is legal to do so. Some states/prov- inces may have laws prohibiting the use of video and navigation screens next to the driver.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 10
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 11 Quick guide 1 1 Quick guide
1-1.. Basic function Display and operation switches ...... 12 Remote Touch...... 14 Menu screen...... 16 Status icon...... 18 “Setup” screen...... 20 Information screen ...... 21 1-2. Navigation operation Operating the map screen...... 22 Guiding the route ...... 23 Registering home...... 24
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 12 1-1. Basic function
1-1.Basic function Display and operation switches
Names of each part
A Microphone (→P.230, 298) B Steering switches (→P.134, 230, 298) C “SOS” button* D Display E Audio control switch (→P.106) F Remote Touch (→P.14) G Touchpad (→P.27) H USB/AUX port (→P.108) *: If equipped. Refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL”. lenses, the screen looks lighter or darker. ●When the temperature is -4 °F (-20°C) or less, the system may not operate. ●When the LCD screen is viewed at an angle, it looks lighter or darker. ●When light from the sun or another external light source strikes the screen, the screen is difficult to see. ●When wearing sunglasses with polarized
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 1-1. Basic function 13
WARNING 1 ●For safety reasons, drivers should avoid performing operations as much Quick guide as possible while driving. Performing operations while driving may cause the driver to mistakenly operate the steer- ing wheel, which may lead to an acci- dent. Stop the vehicle before using. Furthermore, avoid looking at the screen as much as possible while driv- ing. ●Always follow the actual traffic regula- tions and drive according to the road conditions. Routes displayed by the destination guidance may include routes where the vehicle is prohibited from entering due to changes to speed limit signs and routes where the road is too narrow to pass through.
NOTICE ●To prevent the 12-volt battery from becoming fully depleted, do not use the Remote Touch for long periods of time while the engine/hybrid system is turned off.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 14 1-1. Basic function
Remote Touch
The system is primarily operated by the Remote Touch. Remote Touch is the name for the device that includes the “MAP” button, “MENU” button, back button, touchpad and sub function button.
Names and operations of each part
A “MAP” button Press to display the current location* or the compass mode screen. (→P.62, 64) B “MENU” button Press to display the menu screen. (→P.16) C Back button Press to display the previous screen. (→P.27) D Touchpad Operate to select/confirm a button on the screen. (→P.27) Operate to scroll list screens and enlarge/shrink the map.* (→P.29) E Sub function button When is displayed on the screen, a function screen assigned to the screen can be dis- played. (→P.15)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 1-1. Basic function 15
*: With navigation function 1
Using the sub function button Quick guide
Optional functions assigned to the screen can be operated. 1 When the is displayed on the screen, press the button on the Remote Touch.
2 Select the desired item.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 16 1-1. Basic function
Menu screen
Menu screen operation Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch to display the menu screen.
A Select to display the destination screen.*1 (→P.72) B Select to display the radio control screen. (→P.106) C Select to display the media control screen. (→P.106) D Select to display the hands-free control screen. (→P.296) E Select to display the “Apps” screen.*2 (→P.335) F Select to display the information screen. (→P.21) G Select to display the “Setup” screen. (→P.20) H Select to display the air conditioning control screen.*3 *1:With navigation function *2: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. *3: Refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 1-1. Basic function 17
How to use “On cursor shortcut” 1 Moving the cursor over a switch on the menu screen causes shortcut switches to Quick guide display for that switch. The shortcut switches can be used to perform operation procedures more quickly.
A On cursor shortcut
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 18 1-1. Basic function
Status icon play*2 (→P.49) *1: With navigation function Status icons are displayed at the top *2: This function is not made available in of the screen. some countries or areas.
●The number of status icons that can be Status icon explanation displayed differs depending on the dis- played screen.
Reception level display
The level of reception does not always correspond with the level displayed on the cellular phone. The level of recep- tion may not be displayed depending on the phone you have. When the cellular phone is out of the service area or in a place inaccessible by radio waves, / is displayed. “Rm” is displayed when receiving in a A Weather alert display*1 (→P.242) roaming area. While roaming, display • Select to display important weather infor- “Rm” top-left on the icon. mation for the current location or along the The receiving area may not be dis- route. played depending on the type of B Indicate during data communica- Bluetooth® phone you have. tion performed via Data Communi- While connected with cellular cation Module (DCM)*2 phone C The reception level of Data Com- munication Module (DCM) dis- Level Indicators play*2 (→P.18) Poor D The reception level of the con- Excellent nected phone display (→P.18) E Remaining battery charge display (→P.19) F Bluetooth® phone connection condition display (→P.19) G Wi-Fi® connection condition dis-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 1-1. Basic function 19
While using Data Communication Bluetooth® connection condition Module (DCM) 1 display Level Indicators Quick guide An antenna for the Bluetooth® con- Poor nection is built into the instrument Excellent panel. The condition of the Bluetooth® con- ® While using Wi-Fi Hotspot nection may deteriorate and the sys- Level Indicators tem may not function when a Bluetooth® phone is used in the fol- No connection lowing conditions and/or places: Connected The cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when it is behind the seat or in the glove box or ●When Wi-Fi® Hotspot is off, no item is displayed. console box). The cellular phone is touching or is Remaining battery charge dis- covered with metal materials. play Leave the Bluetooth® phone in a place The amount displayed does not always where the condition of the Bluetooth® correspond with the amount displayed connection is good. on the Bluetooth® device. Indicators Conditions The amount of battery charge left may Indicates that the condition not be displayed depending on the ® ® of the Bluetooth connec- type of the Bluetooth device con- (Blue) tion is good. nected. While in this condition, This system does not have a charging sound quality during function. (Gray) phone calls may deterio- rate. Remaining charge Indicators Indicates that the cellular Empty phone is not connected via ® Low Bluetooth .
Full
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 20 1-1. Basic function → “Setup” screen ( P.57) F Select to set vehicle information “Setup” screen such as maintenance information. (→P.58) The “Setup” screen can be reached by G Select to set memory points (home, the following methods: favorites entries, areas to avoid), 1 Press the “MENU” button on the navigation details.*1 (→P.89) Remote Touch. H Select to set Wi-Fi® connection 2 Select “Setup”. settings.*2 (→P.50) 3 Select the desired item. I Select to set Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 settings.*2 (→P.340) J Select to set traffic information set- tings.*1, 2 (→P.97) K Select to set data services set- tings.*1, 2 (→P.244) *1: With navigation function *2: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.
A Select to change the selected lan- guage, operation sound, etc. (→P.53) B Select to set Bluetooth® device and Bluetooth® system settings. (→P.42) C Select to set audio settings. (→P.139) D Select to set the phone sound, con- tacts, message settings, etc. (→P.312) E Select to set the voice settings.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 1-1. Basic function 21
Information screen 1
Information screen Quick guide
The information screen can be reached by the following methods: 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Info”. 3 Select the desired item.
A Select to display the energy moni- tor*1 or fuel consumption screen.*2 B Select to display traffic informa- tion.*3, 4 (→P.70) C Select to display weather informa- tion.*3 (→P.242) D Select to display the vehicle alert history.*3, 4 E Select to display the “eOwner’s Manual” screen.*5 *1: Vehicles with hybrid system *2: Refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL” *3:With navigation function *4: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. *5: Refer to the “eOwner’s Manual”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 22 1-2. Navigation operation
1-2.Navigation operation Operating the map screen* Moving the map screen
*: With navigation function 1 Select the desired point on the map screen. Displaying the current position of the vehicle on the map screen
1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.
Move the desired point on the cen- ter of the map screen.
The current position of the vehicle is displayed on the map screen.
Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch to return to the cur- rent position.
Zooming in/out the map
■ Displaying the map screen ■ Zooming in the map The following operations can also be 1 Select or pinch out on the performed. touchpad of the Remote Touch. → Changing the map direction ( P.64) (→P.65) ■ Zooming out the map Displaying 3D map (→P.65) 1 Select or pinch in on the Changing the map color (→P.94) touchpad of the Remote Touch. (→P.64) Displaying the micro city map (→P.64)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 1-2. Navigation operation 23
* Guiding the route Deleting destinations 1
* : With navigation function When route guidance is no longer Quick guide necessary, such as when you know the Setting the destination rest of the route to your destination, the destination can be deleted. 1 Press the “MAP” button on the 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. Remote Touch.
2 Select . 2 Select . 3 There are different kinds of meth- ods to search for a destination. (→P.72)
3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. When more than 1 destination has 4 Select “Go”. been set, a list will be displayed on Check that the route overview is the screen. Select the item(s) to be displayed. (→P.80) deleted. 5 Select “OK”. Selecting routes other than the one recommended (→P.80) Guidance to the destination is dis- played on the screen and can be heard via voice guidance.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 24 1-2. Navigation operation
Registering home* Setting home as the destination
*: With navigation function 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. Registering home
1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.
2 Select . 3 Select . 4 Select “OK”. 2 Select . Selecting routes other than the one → 3 Select . recommended ( P.80) Guidance to the destination is dis- 4 Select “Yes”. played on the screen and can be 5 There are different kinds of meth- heard via voice guidance. ods to search for your home. (→P.72) 6 Select “OK”. Registration of home is complete. • Registering home in a different way →P.89 • Editing the name, location and icon →P.89 • Setting home as the destination →P.73
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 25 Basic function 2
2 2-1.. Basic information before opera-
tion function Basic Initial screen...... 26 How to use the Remote Touch ...... 27 Operating the screen...... 30 Using side display ...... 32 Entering letters and numbers/list screen operation...... 34 Linking multi-information display and the system...... 37 2-2. Connectivity settings Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® device...... 38 Setting Bluetooth® details ...... 42 Wi-Fi® Hotspot...... 49 2-3. Other settings General settings...... 53 Voice settings...... 57 Vehicle settings...... 58
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 26 2-1. Basic information before operation
2-1.Basic information before operation Initial screen To register maintenance informa- tion: →P.58 When the engine switch
WARNING ●When the vehicle is stopped with the engine running
Maintenance information*
*: With navigation function This system reminds users when to replace certain parts or components and shows dealer information (if regis- tered) on the screen. When the vehicle reaches a previously set driving distance or date specified for a scheduled maintenance check, the maintenance remainder screen will be displayed when the system is turned on. To prevent this screen from being displayed again, select “Do Not Tell Me Again”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-1. Basic information before operation 27
How to use the Remote feedback force (vibration) is gener- Touch ated by the touchpad. This feedback force can be adjusted. (→P.53) This system can be operated by the 2 Remote Touch when the engine Press the “MENU” button on the switch
●Perform touchpad operations using a fin- ger. Do not use nails or other objects like pens, etc. ●Perform pointer movement operations using only one finger. The pointer cannot be operated by using more than one fin- ger. 2 The buttons on the screen can be ●When water or other foreign materials are on the touchpad, a malfunction may selected by either depressing or occur. In those cases, wipe off the water double tapping on the touchpad. or foreign materials and wait about 30 Once a button has been selected, seconds before operating the touchpad. the screen will change. ●In the following cases, there is a possibility that the touchpad may not react nor- mally: • When wearing gloves, etc. • When operated with a wet hand. • When a film, paint-like substance, etc., is on the touchpad. • When water or other foreign matter is on the touchpad. • Near a TV tower, electrical power plant, gas station, large display, airport or other facility that generates strong radio waves or electrical noise. • When wireless devices, such as portable When the pointer moves close to a radios and mobile phones are nearby. button, it will automatically snap to • When the following metal items are that button and the Remote Touch placed on the touchpad:
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 28 2-1. Basic information before operation
Coins Keys ●Setting for the touchpad, such as move- Metal parts of a wallet or purse ment speed of the pointer, can be A card in which aluminum foil, etc., is changed. (→P.53) attached A box of cigarettes that uses aluminum foil Trace Disposable hand warmers Media such as CD/DVDs, USB cables, Trace the pad surface while maintain- etc. ing contact with the touchpad. • When the temperature is -4 °F (-20°C) or less Moving the cursor and the pointer. ●If a hand or object was placed on the touchpad when the engine switch
NOTICE ●Do not allow the Remote Touch to come into contact with food, liquid, stickers or lit cigarettes as doing so may cause damage. ●Do not subject the Remote Touch to excessive pressure or strong impact as doing so may cause damage. ●Do not push the touchpad with a strong force or use a sharp pointed Flick object to operate the pad, as it is possi- ble to cause damage. Quick and long movement along the touchpad with your finger. Touchpad gestures Moving the list screen or map* Operations are performed by touching screen. the touchpad with your finger.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-1. Basic information before operation 29
2 Basic function Basic
*: With navigation function
●With navigation function: To move the map, “Map Flick” on the detailed naviga- tion settings is required to be “On”. (→P.94) ●The behavior of the flick operation differs depending on whether the vehicle is in motion or parked.
Pinch in/Pinch out*
*: With navigation function Slide fingers toward each other or apart on the touchpad. Changing the scale of the map.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 30 2-1. Basic information before operation
Operating the screen
The screen can be operated in full screen or split-screen mode. Split-screen mode can display different information side-by-side. When the split-screen is displayed, it is necessary to select the screen you wish to operate.
Names and operations of each part
A Sub menu Selecting the sub menu item switches the information displayed on the main display. The displayed items differ according to the function. B Main display For details about the functions and operation of the main display, refer to the respective section.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-1. Basic information before operation 31
C Side display icon The side menu can be displayed by moving the cursor over an icon and selecting the desired screen. D Sub menu icon 2 Move the cursor over an icon to display its sub menu. Basic function Basic E Side display The following functions can be displayed and operated on the side display. • Navigation system*1 (→P.32) •Audio (→P.33) • Vehicle information*2 • Air conditioning*2 *1:With navigation function *2: Refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 32 2-1. Basic information before operation
Using side display
Switching the side display
To change the screen displayed on the side display, use the screen buttons on the right side of the display. 1 Select the desired button. Map scale
1 Select or to change the scale of the map screen.
Orientation of the map
1 Select , or . A Select to display the navigation screen. (→P.32) Switching the map mode B Select to display the audio control 1 Select or to change the screen. (→P.33) map mode. C Select to display the vehicle infor- For details about the map mode, * mation screen. refer to “Switching the map mode D Select to display the air condition- on the side display”. (→P.68) ing control screen.* E Select to hide/show the side dis- Editing map play. 1 Select any point on the side map. * : Refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL” 2 Select the desired item.
Navigation system
A map* or a compass with information about the current position can be dis- played. *: With navigation function
A Select to display POI icons. (→P.67)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-1. Basic information before operation 33
B Select to show traffic information. (→P.70)
Audio/visual system 2 Basic function Basic Switching modes
1 Select . A Select to change the chap- ter/track/file. Select and hold to fast rewind. B Select to stop the video screen. C Select to play/pause. D Select to change the chap- ter/track/file. During playback: Select and hold to 2 Select the desired source. fast forward. ■ Radio operation During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward. On the side display, preset stations can be selected. ●Depending on the audio source, some functions may not be available.
A Select to skips backward 2 minutes. B Select to play/pause.* C Select to skips forward 2 minutes. *: Cache radio ■ Media operation Operations such as selecting a chap- ter, file or track are carried out on the screen.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 34 2-1. Basic information before operation
* Entering letters and num- : With navigation function bers/list screen operation ●Keyboard layout can be changed. (→P.53) Entering letters and numbers Changing character and key- When searching by an address, name, board type etc., or entering data, letters and num- bers can be entered via the screen. 1 Select “Change Type”.
A When this icon is displayed, select 2 Select the desired character and keyboard. to enable the dictation function.* (English only) (→P.232) B Text field. Entered character(s) will be displayed. C Select to erase one character. Select and hold to continue erasing characters. D Select to move the cursor. E Select to display a list of predictive ●Depending on the screen being dis- played, it may not possible to change key- text candidates when there is more board characters. than one. (→P.34) F Select to make a space on cursor. Select to display predictive text G Select to change character and candidates → keyboard types. ( P.34) When text is input, the system predicts H Select to enter characters in lower the text that may complete the cur- case or in upper case. rently unconfirmed text and displays I Select to enter desired characters. predictive replacement candidates that match the beginning of the text. J Select to display predictive text 1 Input text. candidates for entered text. (→P.34)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-1. Basic information before operation 35 2 Select the desired candidate. desired character. Depending on the input screen and conditions, the following operations can be performed. 2 • Back space: Draw a straight line from the bottom right to the bottom left. function Basic • Space: Draw a line from the top left to the bottom left and then continue to the bottom right at a right angle. To select a candidate that is not dis- • Line Break: Draw a line from the top played, select , and then right to the bottom right and then con- select the desired predictive tinue to the bottom left at a right angle. replacement candidate. ●To deselect the handwriting input range, press the touchpad of the Remote Touch or sub function button.
List screen
The list screen may be displayed after entering characters. When a list is dis- played, use the appropriate screen button to scroll through the list. Hand writing method
Characters can be entered by hand Scrolling list screen writing.
A Select this part to scroll the list by A Write the characters to be entered. operating the scroll bar. B Select the candidate character that To release scrolling the list, select corresponds to the entered hand the scroll bar again. written character. B Select to scroll the list. C Select the candidate character that is displayed to enter the next ●With navigation function: Matching items
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 36 2-1. Basic information before operation from the database are listed even if the 2 Input text. entered address or name is incomplete. ●With navigation function: The list will be displayed automatically if the maximum number of characters is entered or matching items can be displayed on a sin- gle list screen. ●With navigation function: The number of matching items is shown on the right side of the screen. If the number of matching items is more than 999, the system dis- plays “***” on the screen. 3 Select “Search”. ●With navigation function: It can be per- formed even if the “Map Flick” is set to 4 The list is displayed. “Off”. (→P.94)
List screen flick operation
The list can be scrolled by flick opera- tion when the cursor is over the top or bottom part of the list.
●When text is input, a candidate list of items to search for is displayed on the side screen.
Sorting*
*: With navigation function Searching a list The order of a list displayed on the screen can be sorted in the order of Items are displayed in the list with the distance from the current location, most similar results of the search at the date, category, etc. top. 1 Press the button on the Remote 1 Select . Touch.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-1. Basic information before operation 37
2 Select the desired sorting criteria. Linking multi-information display and the system
The following functions of the sys- 2 tem are linked with the multi-infor- mation display in the instrument function Basic cluster: Audio Phone etc. These functions can be operated using multi-information display control switches on the steering wheel. For details, refer to “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 38 2-2. Connectivity settings
2-2.Connectivity settings Registering/Connecting a 4 Select “Yes” to register a phone. ® Bluetooth device 5 Select the desired Bluetooth® device. To use the hands-free system, it is necessary to register a Bluetooth® phone with the system. Once the phone has been regis- tered, it is possible to use the hands-free system. This operation cannot be per- formed while driving. 6 Register the Bluetooth® device using your Bluetooth® device. ® Registering a Bluetooth phone For details about operating the for the first time Bluetooth® device, see the manual ■ Registering from the system that comes with it. 1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection A PIN code is not required for SSP setting of your cellular phone on. (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on This function is not available when the type of Bluetooth® device being Bluetooth® connection setting of connected, a message confirming your cellular phone is set to off. registration may be displayed on the 2 Press the “MENU” button on the Bluetooth® device’s screen. Remote Touch. Respond and operate the Bluetooth® device according to the confirmation message. 7 Check that the following screen is displayed, indicating pairing was successful.
3 Select “Phone”. Operations up to this point can also be performed by pressing the switch on the steering wheel.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-2. Connectivity settings 39
The system is connecting to the reg- 4 Press the button on the Remote istered device. Touch to select “If you cannot find…” At this stage, the Bluetooth® func- on the bottom of the screen. tions are not yet available. 5 Select “Register from Phone”. 2 8 Check that “Connected” is dis- ® 6 Register the Bluetooth device function Basic played and registration is complete. using your Bluetooth® device. For details about operating the Bluetooth® device, see the manual that comes with it. A PIN code is not required for SSP (Secure Simple Pairing) compatible Bluetooth® devices. Depending on ® If an error message is displayed, fol- the type of Bluetooth device being low the guidance on the screen to connected, a message confirming try again. registration may be displayed on the Bluetooth® device’s screen. ●If a cellular phone does not operate prop- Respond and operate the erly after being connected, turn the cellu- ® lar phone off and on and then connect it Bluetooth device according to the again. confirmation message. ■ Registering from phone 7 Check that the following screen is displayed, indicating pairing was When registering from the system is successful. failed, or the phone name doesn’t appear on the registering screen, need to connect the Bluetooth® phone manually. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Phone”. Operations up to this point can also The registered device is connecting be performed by pressing the to the system. switch on the steering wheel. At this stage, the Bluetooth® func- 3 Select “Yes” to register a phone. tions are not yet available.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 40 2-2. Connectivity settings 8 Check that “Connected” is dis- 2 Press the “MENU” button on the played and registration is complete. Remote Touch.
If an error message is displayed, fol- low the guidance on the screen to 3 Select “Media”. try again. 4 Select “Source” on the sub menu. * ●If a cellular phone does not operate prop- 5 Select “Bluetooth ”. erly after being connected, turn the cellu- * ® lar phone off and on and then connect it : The Bluetooth word mark and logos again. are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Registering a Bluetooth® audio player for the first time
To use the Bluetooth® audio, it is nec- essary to register an audio player with the system. Once the player has been registered, it ® is possible to use the Bluetooth 6 Select “Yes” to register an audio audio. player. This operation cannot be performed while driving. For details about registering a Bluetooth® device: →P.44 1 Turn the Bluetooth® connection setting of your audio player on. This function is not available when ® 7 Follow the steps in “Registering a the Bluetooth connection setting ® of your audio player is set to off. Bluetooth phone for the first time” from step 5. (→P.38)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-2. Connectivity settings 41
Profiles mended: Ver. 1.6) • This is a profile to allow remote control This system supports the following ser- the A/V equipment. vices. 2 ● ® This system is not guaranteed to operate ■ Bluetooth Core Specification ®
with all Bluetooth devices. function Basic Ver. 2.0 (Recommended: Ver. 4.1 ●If your cellular phone does not support +EDR) HFP, registering the Bluetooth® phone or using OPP, PBAP, MAP or SPP pro- ■ Profiles files individually will not be possible. HFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver. 1.0 ●If the connected Bluetooth® device ver- (Recommended: Ver. 1.7) sion is older than recommended or incompatible, the Bluetooth® device • This is a profile to allow hands-free function may not work properly. phone calls using a cellular phone or ●Refer to head set. It has outgoing and incoming http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink to find call functions. approved Bluetooth® phones for this sys- OPP (Object Push Profile) Ver. 1.1 tem. (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) ●Certification • This is a profile to transfer contacts data. PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recommended: Ver. 1.2) • This is a profile to transfer phonebook data. MAP (Message Access Profile) Recommended: Ver. 1.2 Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. • This is a profile to use phone message functions. SPP (Serial Port Profile) Recom- mended: Ver. 1.2 • This is a profile to use the “Lexus Enform” function. A2DP (Advanced Audio Distribu- tion Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recom- mended: Ver. 1.3) • This is a profile to transmit stereo audio or high quality sound to the audio sys- tem. AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Control Profile) Ver. 1.0 (Recom-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 42 2-2. Connectivity settings
Setting Bluetooth® details C Deleting a Bluetooth® device (→P.45) Displaying the Bluetooth® setup D Setting the Bluetooth® system screen (→P.46)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the Connecting a Bluetooth® Remote Touch. device
Up to 5 Bluetooth® devices (Phones (HFP) and audio players (AVP)) can be registered. If more than 1 Bluetooth® device has been registered, select which device to connect to. 1 Display the Bluetooth® setup 2 Select “Setup”. screen: * 3 Select “Bluetooth ” on the sub “MENU” button → “Setup” → menu. “Bluetooth*” * ® : The Bluetooth word mark and logos * ® are registered trademarks owned by : The Bluetooth word mark and logos Bluetooth SIG, Inc. are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 4 Select the desired item to be set. 2 Select “Registered Device”. Bluetooth® setup screen 3 Select the device to be connected.
: Phone A Connecting a Bluetooth® device : Audio player and editing the Bluetooth® device information (→P.42, 45) : Phone/“Lexus Enform” service The profile icon for a currently con- B Registering a Bluetooth® device nected device will be displayed in (→P.44)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-2. Connectivity settings 43 color. Connecting a Bluetooth® device Selecting a profile icon which is not in a different way (from phone currently connected will switch the setup screen) connection to the function. 2 1 Press the “MENU” button on the If the desired Bluetooth® device is Remote Touch. function Basic not on the list, select “Add New 2 Select “Setup”. Device” to register the device. (→P.44) 3 Select “Phone” on the sub menu. 4 Select the desired connection. 4 Select “Connect Phone”. 5 Select the device to be connected.
Connecting a Bluetooth® device in a different way (from phone screen)
1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. ® When another Bluetooth device is 2 Select “Phone”. connected 3 Select “Select Device” on the sub ® To disconnect the Bluetooth menu. device, select “Yes”. 4 Select desired device name from 5 Check that a confirmation screen is the list. displayed when the connection is complete. Connecting a Bluetooth® device If an error message is displayed, fol- in a different way (from low the guidance on the screen to Bluetooth® audio screen) try again. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the ● It may take time if the device connection Remote Touch. is carried out during Bluetooth® audio playback. 2 Select “Media”. ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® 3 Select “Source” on the sub menu. device being connected, it may be neces- sary to perform additional steps on the 4 Select “Bluetooth*”. device. *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos ●When disconnecting a Bluetooth® device, it is recommended to disconnect are registered trademarks owned by using the system. Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 5 Select “Connect”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 44 2-2. Connectivity settings
6 Select desired device name from “Bluetooth*” the list. *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos ■ Auto connection mode are registered trademarks owned by To turn auto connection mode on, set Bluetooth SIG, Inc. “Bluetooth* Power” to on. (→P.46) 2 Follow the steps in “Connecting a ® Leave the Bluetooth® device in a loca- Bluetooth device” from step 2. tion where the connection can be (→P.42) established. ■ Reconnecting the Bluetooth® *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos phone are registered trademarks owned by ® Bluetooth SIG, Inc. If a Bluetooth phone is disconnected due to poor reception from the When the engine switch
matic connection priority is set to on ® and there is more than one regis- Up to 5 Bluetooth devices can be registered. tered Bluetooth® phone available, the system will automatically con- Bluetooth® compatible phones (HFP) nect to the Bluetooth® phone with and audio players (AVP) can be regis- the highest priority. (→P.46) tered simultaneously. ■ Connecting manually This operation cannot be performed while driving. When the auto connection has failed ® or “Bluetooth* Power” is turned off, it is 1 Display the Bluetooth setup screen: necessary to connect the Bluetooth® → → device manually. “MENU” button “Setup” “Bluetooth*” *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos Bluetooth SIG, Inc. are registered trademarks owned by 1 Display the Bluetooth® setup Bluetooth SIG, Inc. screen: 2 Select “Add New Device”. “MENU” button → “Setup” →
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-2. Connectivity settings 45
® When another Bluetooth device is 5 Check that a confirmation screen is connected displayed when the operation is complete. To disconnect the Bluetooth® 2 device, select “Yes”. ●When deleting a Bluetooth® phone, the contact data will be deleted at the same
® function Basic When 5 Bluetooth devices have time. already been registered A registered device needs to be Editing the Bluetooth® device replaced. Select “Yes”, and select information the device to be replaced. ® 3 Follow the steps in “Registering a The Bluetooth device’s information Bluetooth® phone for the first time” can be displayed on the screen. The from step 5. (→P.38) displayed information can be edited. This operation cannot be performed Deleting a Bluetooth® device while driving. 1 Display the Bluetooth® setup This operation cannot be performed screen: while driving. “MENU” button → “Setup” → 1 Display the Bluetooth® setup “Bluetooth*” screen: * ® “MENU” button → “Setup” → : The Bluetooth word mark and logos * are registered trademarks owned by “Bluetooth ” Bluetooth SIG, Inc. *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos 2 Select “Registered Device”. are registered trademarks owned by 3 Select the desired device to be Bluetooth SIG, Inc. edited. 2 Select “Remove Device”. 4 Select “Device Info”. 3 Select the desired device.
4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 46 2-2. Connectivity settings
5 Confirm and change the ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® Bluetooth® device information. phone, some information may not be dis- played.
Changing a device name
1 Select “Device Name”. 2 Enter the name and select “OK”.
●Even if the device name is changed, the name registered in your Bluetooth® device does not change.
Setting audio player connection method
1 Select “Connect Audio Player From”. 2 Select the desired connection A The name of the Bluetooth® device method. is displayed. It can be changed to a desired name. (→P.46) B Select to set the Bluetooth® audio player connection method. (→P.46) C Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed. D Phone number is unique to the “Vehicle”: Select to connect the audio player from the vehicle's audio system. Bluetooth® phone and cannot be “Device”: Select to connect the vehicle's changed. audio system from the audio player. E Compatibility profile is unique to Depending on the audio player, the the Bluetooth® device and cannot “Vehicle” or “Device” connection be changed. method may be best. As such, refer to the manual that comes with the F Select to reset all setup items. audio player.
●If 2 Bluetooth® devices have been regis- tered with the same device name, the “Detailed Settings” screen devices can be distinguished referring to the device’s address. The Bluetooth® settings can be con-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-2. Connectivity settings 47
firmed and changed. The Bluetooth® device is discon- 1 Display the Bluetooth® setup nected, and the system will not connect screen: to it next time. “MENU” button → “Setup” → *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos 2 * are registered trademarks owned by
“Bluetooth ” function Basic Bluetooth SIG, Inc. *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by ●While driving, the auto connection state Bluetooth SIG, Inc. can be changed from off to on, but can- not be changed from on to off. 2 Select “Detailed Settings”. 3 Select the desired item to be set. Setting automatic connection priority
The automatic connection priority of the registered Bluetooth® devices can be changed. 1 Select “Preferred Device Settings”. 2 Select the desired item to be set.
A Select to set Bluetooth® connec- tion on/off. (→P.47) B Select to change the automatic connection priority of the regis- tered Bluetooth® devices. (→P.47) C Select to edit the system informa- tion. (→P.48) A Select to set automatic connection D Select to reset all setup items. priority on/off. B Select to change the automatic Changing “Bluetooth* Power” connection priority of the regis- tered Bluetooth® phones. (→P.48) 1 Select “Bluetooth* Power”. C Select to change the automatic * When “Bluetooth Power” is on: connection priority of the regis- ® The Bluetooth device is automatically tered Bluetooth® audio players. connected when the engine switch (→P.48)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 48 2-2. Connectivity settings ■ Changing phone automatic con- 2 Select the desired item to be set. nection priority 1 Select “Preferred Phones”. 2 Select the desired Bluetooth® device and select “Move Up” or “Move Down” to change the pre- ferred order.
■ Changing audio player automatic connection priority A Displays system name. Can be 1 Select “Preferred Audio Players”. changed to a desired name. (→P.48) 2 Select the desired Bluetooth® device and select “Move Up” or B PIN code used when the “Move Down” to change the pre- Bluetooth® device was registered. ferred order. Can be changed to a desired code. (→P.48) C Device address is unique to the device and cannot be changed. D Select to set the connection status display of the phone on/off. E Select to set the connection status display of the audio player on/off. F Compatibility profile of the system ●A newly registered Bluetooth® device will automatically be given the highest G Select to reset all setup items. automatic connection priority. ■ Editing the system name Editing the system information 1 Select “System Name”. 2 Enter a name and select “OK”. 1 Select “System Information”. ■ Editing the PIN code 1 Select “System PIN Code”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-2. Connectivity settings 49
2 Enter a PIN code and select “OK”. Wi-Fi® Hotspot
By connecting a device to the vehi- cle via Wi-Fi®, it can access the 2 internet through the DCM. Basic function Basic To use this function, a Wi-Fi® Hotspot service subscription from Verizon Wireless is required. Contact your Lexus dealer for details. This function is not made available in some countries or areas.
Connecting a device to the in-vehicle access point
Searching for and connecting a device to the vehicle access point
1 Enable the Wi-Fi® Hotspot func- tion. (→P.50) 2 Disable the “Hide Access Point” function. (→P.50) 3 Search for the vehicle access point using the device you wish to con- nect. For details about operating the device, refer to the documentation which came with it. 4 Operate the device to connect it to the vehicle access point. To check the vehicle access point password, check “Password”. (→P.50)
●Hints for connecting to the vehicle via
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 50 2-2. Connectivity settings
Wi-Fi® can be displayed. (→P.50) *: Wi-Fi is a registered mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®. Connecting a device to the 4 Select the desired item to be set. in-vehicle access point using the access point name (SSID)
1 Enable the Wi-Fi® Hotspot func- tion. (→P.50) 2 Enable the “Hide Access Point” function. (→P.49) 3 Enter the access point name (SSID) into the device you wish to connect and connect it. To check the vehicle access point password, check “Password”. (→P.50) The security settings on the device must be the same as that displayed for “Security”. (→P.50) A Select to enable/disable the Wi-Fi® For details about operating the Hotspot function. (→P.51) device, refer to the documentation B Select to check/change the access which came with it. point password. (→P.51) C Select to display hints for connect- ® Changing the Wi-Fi settings ing to the vehicle via Wi-Fi®. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the D Select to make the access point Remote Touch. searchable/unsearchable. E Select to check/change the secu- rity protocol of the access point (for authentication and encryption). (→P.51) F Select to change the access point name (SSID). (→P.51) G Select to change the Wi-Fi® con- nection channel (within the 2 Select “Setup”. 2.4GHz frequency band). (→P.51) 3 Select “Wi-Fi*” on the sub menu. ●If any settings have been changed, it will
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-2. Connectivity settings 51
be necessary to reset the Wi-Fi® system Changing the password to complete the changes. To reset the Wi-Fi® system, select “Yes” on the 1 Select “Change Password”. pop-up displayed after changing the set- tings. 2 Enter the desired password and 2 select “OK”. Enabling/disabling the Wi-Fi® The password must be at least 8 function Basic hotspot function characters long. The password with non-ASCII can- When the Wi-Fi® Hotspot function is not be used. enabled, the system checks for a valid Hotspot service subscription. Changing the security protocol If a Hotspot service subscription has not been started, start the App Suite 1 Select “Security”. application to activate the service sub- 2 Select the desired security proto- scription. (If the App Suite application col. has not been installed, install the appli- cation.) Changing the access point name Contact your Lexus dealer for details (SSID) about the App Suite application. 1 Select “Access Point Name”. Checking/changing the pass- 2 Enter the desired access point word name (SSID) and select “OK”.
1 Select “Password”. Selecting a Wi-Fi® connection 2 Check that the following screen is channel displayed. 1 Select “Channel”. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed.
A Displays the password B Select to display/hide the entered password. C Select to change the password. A Select to change the channel selec- tion to automatic/manual.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 52 2-2. Connectivity settings
B When “Manual” is selected, select ●Your audio unit is fitted with Wi-Fi® to change the channel. antennas. People with implantable car- diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchro- nization therapy-pacemakers or Changing the channel implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance 1 Set “Select Channel” to “Manual”. between themselves and the Wi-Fi® antennas. 2 Select “Channel Number”. The radio waves may affect the opera- 3 Enter the desired channel number tion of such devices. and select “OK”. ●Before using Wi-Fi® devices, users of Channels 1 through 11 can be any electrical medical device other than implantable cardiac pacemakers, selected. cardiac resynchronization ther- apy-pacemakers or implantable car- ® dioverter defibrillators should consult Wi-Fi function operating hints the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. ●If a connected device is taken out of the Radio waves could have unexpected Wi-Fi® connection area, the connection effects on the operation of such medi- will be severed. cal devices. ●If the vehicle is driven out of the cellular communication coverage area, connect- ® ing to the internet via the Wi-Fi® Hotspot Conditions displayed with Wi-Fi will not be possible. icon ● ® If a Bluetooth device is used while a ® device is connected using the Wi-Fi® The condition of Wi-Fi connection Hotspot function, the communication appears on the right upper side of the speed may decrease. screen. (→P.18) ●Depending on the environment in which the access point is used, the communica- tion speed may be low or communication Specifications may not be possible. Communication standards WARNING 802.11b 802.11g ●Use Wi-Fi® devices only when safe and legal to do so. 802.11n (2.4GHz) Security WPA™ WPA2™ • WPA and WPA2 are registered mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-3. Other settings 53
2-3.Other settings General settings “Language” Select to change the language. Settings are available for automatic “Display” screen change, operation sounds, Select to adjust the contrast and brightness 2 etc. of the screens, turn the screen off, etc. (→P.55) function Basic Displaying the general settings “Theme Setting” screen Select to change the screen theme setting. * 1 Press the “MENU” button on the “Unit of Temperature” Remote Touch. Select to change the unit of temperature. “Units of Measurement” Select to change the unit of measure for distance*/fuel consumption. “Auto Change to Screen”* Select to set automatic screen changes from the audio/air conditioning control screen to the map screen to on/off. When set to on, the screen will automatically 2 Select “Setup”. return to the map screen from the audio/air If the general settings screen is not conditioning control screen after 20 sec- onds. displayed, select “General”. “Selection Sound” 3 Select the desired items to be set. Select to set the selection sounds on/off. “Pointer Sound” Select to set the pointer sounds on/off. “Error Sound” Select to set the error sounds on/off. “Pointer Sound Volume” Select to adjust the pointer sound volume. General settings screen “Feedback Force” Select to adjust the level of the haptic feed- “Clock” back force (vibration) to the touchpad, Select to change the time zone, set the when selecting a screen button. daylight saving time on/off and set the “Cursor Speed” automatic adjustment of the clock on/off. (→P.54) Select to adjust the pointer speed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 54 2-3. Other settings “Multi-Touch Command” automatic time adjustment on/off. Select to set the multi-touch command 1 Display the general settings screen: on/off. “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Keyboard Layout” “General” Select to change the keyboard layout. 2 Select “Clock”. “Delete Keyboard History” 3 Select the desired items to be set. Select to delete the keyboard history. “Memorize Keyboard History” Select to set the memorize keyboard his- tory on/off. “Delete Search History” Select to delete the search history. “Delete Personal Data” A Select to delete personal data. (→P.56) Select to change the time zone. (→P.54) “Software Update” B Select to set daylight saving time Select to update software versions. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. on/off. C Select to set automatic adjustment “Software Update Setting”* of the clock by GPS on/off. When Select to set software update setting. set to off, the clock can be manually → ( P.56) adjusted. (→P.54) “Gracenote Database Update” Select to update “Gracenote” database Setting the time zone versions. For details, contact your Lexus dealer. 1 Select “Time Zone”. “Software Information” 2 Select the desired time zone. Select to display the software information. If “Auto” is selected, the time zone is Notices related to third party software selected automatically by current used in this product are enlisted. (This vehicle position. includes instructions for obtaining such software, where applicable.) If “Other” is selected, the zone can be adjusted manually. Select “+” or *: With navigation function “-” to adjust the time zone. Clock settings Manual clock setting Used for changing the time zone and setting of daylight saving time and When “Auto Adjust by GPS” is turned “Off”, the clock can be manually
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-3. Other settings 55 adjusted. 3 Select the desired items to be set. 1 Select the desired item.
2 Basic function Basic
A Select to turn the screen off. To turn A Select “+” to set the time forward it on, press any button on the audio one hour and “-” to set the time control switch or on the Remote back one hour. Touch. B Select “+” to set the time forward B Select to turn day mode on/off. one minute and “-” to set the time (→P.55) back one minute. C Select to adjust the screen display. C Select to round to the nearest hour. (→P.55) e.g. D Select to adjust the camera display. → 1:00 to 1:29 → 1:00 ( P.55) 1:30 to 1:59 → 2:00 Changing between day and night mode Display settings (screen adjust- ment) Depending on the position of the head- light switch, the screen changes to day The contrast and brightness of the or night mode. This feature is available screen display and the image of the when the headlight is switched on. camera display can be adjusted. The screen can also be turned off, and/or 1 Select “Day Mode”. changed to either day or night mode. ●If the screen is set to day mode with the (For information regarding headlight switch turned on, this condition audio/visual screen adjustment: is memorized even with the engine →P.110)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 56 2-3. Other settings 2 Select the desired item. Software update settings* “Display (General)” screen only: *: With navigation function Select or to select the desired display. When the automatic update check function is enabled, if a software •“Contrast” update is available from the Lexus “+”: Select to strengthen the contrast of the Enform center, a message will be dis- screen. played. “-”: Select to weaken the contrast of the 1 Display the general settings screen: screen. → → •“Brightness” “MENU” button “Setup” “General” “+”: Select to brighten the screen. 2 Select “Software Update Setting”. “-”: Select to darken the screen. 3 Select “Automatic Update Check” Deleting personal data to enable/disable the automatic update check function. Registered or changed personal set- tings will be deleted or returned to their default conditions. 1 Display the general settings screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → “General” 2 Select “Delete Personal Data”. 3 Select “Delete”. ●When software update information is dis- 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation played, contact your Lexus dealer. screen appears. Examples of settings that can be returned to their default conditions: General settings Navigation settings* Audio settings Phone settings Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 set- tings etc. *: With navigation function
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-3. Other settings 57
Voice settings A Select to adjust the volume of voice guidance. Voice volume, etc. can be set. B Select to set the voice guidance during route guidance on/off.* 2 C Displaying the voice settings Select to set the voice guidance function Basic screen during audio/visual and/or air con- ditioning system use on/off.* 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. D Select to set the voice recognition prompts. E Select to train voice recognition. The voice command system adapt the user accent. F Select to start the voice recognition tutorial. G Select to set the beep sound of nav- igation guidance.* 2 Select “Setup”. H Select to set the voice prompt 3 Select “Voice” on the sub menu. interrupt on/off. 4 Select the desired items to be set. I Select to set the web search engine. The search engines are Voice settings screen Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 appli- cations. This item is displayed when two or more POI search applica- tions are installed.* (→P.340) J Select to reset all setup items. *: With navigation function
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 58 2-3. Other settings
Vehicle settings D Select to set valet mode. (→P.60) *1: With navigation function Settings are available for mainte- *2: Refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL” nance, vehicle customization, etc. *3: If equipped
Displaying the vehicle settings Maintenance* screen *: With navigation function 1 Press the “MENU” button on the When the system is turned on, the Remote Touch. maintenance reminder screen displays when it is time to replace a part or cer- tain components. (→P.26) 1 Display the vehicle settings screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Vehicle” 2 Select “Maintenance”. 3 Select the desired item.
2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Vehicle” on the sub menu. 4 Select the desired items to be set.
Vehicle settings screen
A Select to set a reminder for a part or component. (→P.59) B Select to add a reminder other than the provided ones. C Select to cancel all reminders which have been entered. A Select to set maintenance.*1 D Select to reset all reminders which (→P.58) have expired. B Select to set vehicle customiza- E Select to call the registered dealer. tion.*2 F Select to register/edit dealer infor- → C Select to set driving mode.*2, 3 mation. ( P.59)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 2-3. Other settings 59
G The system is set to give mainte- Dealer setting nance information with the mainte- nance reminder screen. (→P.26) Dealer information can be registered in the system. With dealer information 2 ●When the vehicle needs to be serviced, registered, route guidance to the the screen button color will change to
dealer is available. function Basic orange. 1 Select “Set Dealer”. Maintenance information setting 2 Select the desired item to search for the location. (→P.72) 1 Select the desired part or compo- The editing dealer screen appears nent screen button. after setting the location. 2 Set the conditions. 3 Select the desired items to be edited.
A Select to enter the next mainte- nance date. A Select to enter the name of a B Select to enter the driving distance dealer. (→P.59) until the next maintenance check. B Select to enter the name of a dealer C Select to cancel the conditions member. (→P.59) which have been entered. C Select to set the location. (→P.60) D Select to reset the conditions which D Select to enter the phone number. have expired. (→P.60) 3 Select “OK” after entering the con- E Select to delete the dealer informa- ditions. tion displayed on the screen. ●For scheduled maintenance information, F Select to set the displayed dealer as refer to “Warranty and Service Guide”, a destination. (→P.79) “Owner’s Manual Supplement” or “Scheduled Maintenance”. ●Depending on driving or road conditions, Editing dealer or contact name the actual date and distance that mainte- nance should be performed may differ 1 Select “Dealer” or “Contact”. from the stored date and distance in the system. 2 Enter the name and select “OK”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 60 2-3. Other settings
Editing the location ●If the 4-digit personal code is forgotten, please contact your Lexus dealer. 1 Select “Location”. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point If the valet mode has been acti- (→P.66) and select “Enter”. vated
1 Enter the 4-digit personal code and Editing phone number select “OK”. 1 Select “Phone #”. ●If an incorrect security code (4-digit 2 Enter the phone number and select number) is entered 6 times, the system “OK”. will not accept another security code (4-digit number) for 10 minutes. Setting the valet mode
The security system can be set to on by entering a security code (4-digit num- ber). When set to on, the system will become inoperative once the electri- cal power source is disconnected until the security code is entered. 1 Display the vehicle settings screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Vehicle” 2 Select “Valet Mode”. 3 Enter the 4-digit personal code and select “OK”. 4 Enter the same 4-digit personal code again and select “OK”. The system will request that you input the security code again to confirm that you remember it cor- rectly. When valet mode activates, the sys- tem stops and a security code (4-digit number) standby screen is displayed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 61 Navigation system 3
3-1.. Basic operation Navigation...... 62 3 Map screen operation ...... 64
Map screen information...... 67 Navigation system Traffic information...... 70 3-2. Destination search Destination search operation ...... 72 Starting route guidance...... 79 3-3. Route guidance Route guidance screen...... 83 Typical voice guidance prompts ...... 86 Editing route...... 87 3-4. Setup Navigation settings...... 89 Detailed navigation settings .... 94 Traffic settings...... 97 Use of information accumulated by navigation system...... 101 3-5. Tips for the navigation system GPS (Global Positioning System) ...... 102 Map database version and cov- ered area ...... 104
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 62 3-1. Basic operation
3-1.Basic operation Navigation*
*: With navigation function The navigation system indicates your present position and assists in locating a desired destination. To display the map screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.
Map screen overview
A 2D north up, 2D heading up or 3D heading up symbol (→P.65) Indicates whether the map orientation is set to north-up or heading-up. The let- ter(s) under this symbol indicate the vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N for north). In 3D map, only a heading-up view is available. B Destination button (→P.72) Select to display the destination screen. C Map options button (→P.67) Select to display the map options screen. D Route options button (→P.87) Select to display the route options screen. E Mute button Select to mute the voice guidance.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-1. Basic operation 63
F Micro city map button (→P.64) Select to display the micro city map screen. G Zoom in/out button (→P.64) Select to magnify or reduce the map scale. When either button is selected, the map scale indicator bar appears at the bottom of the screen. H Route information bar (→P.83) Displays the distance with the estimated travel time/arrival time to the destina- 3 tion. The route information bar fills from left to right as the vehicle progresses Navigation system on the route. I Delete destination button (→P.23) Select to delete destinations. J Speed limit icon (→P.67) Indicates the speed limit on the current road. The display of the speed limit icon can be set to on/off.
●When the vehicle is not receiving GPS signals, such as when driving in a tunnel, will be displayed at the bot- tom left corner of the screen. ●Certain screen buttons on the map screen will disappear several seconds after stop operating the Remote Touch. This setting can be changed so that all the screen buttons will always be displayed. (→P.94) ●Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch to display the address of the cur- rent position on the map screen or repeat voice guidance.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 64 3-1. Basic operation
Map screen operation Map scale
Current position display 1 Select or to change the scale of the map screen. 1 Press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch.
●The scale indicator bar appears at the bottom of the screen. 2 Check that the current position ●Select and hold or to continue map is displayed. changing the scale of the map screen. ●The scale of the map screen can also be To correct the current position man- changed by selecting the scale bar ually: →P.96 directly. This function is not available while driving. ● ●While driving, the current position mark The scale of the map screen can be is fixed on the screen and the map moves. changed on the touchpad of the Remote Touch with your finger. ●The current position is automatically set Pinch out on the touchpad to zoom in and as the vehicle receives signals from the pinch in to zoom out. (→P.29) GPS (Global Positioning System). If the ● current position is not correct, it is auto- In areas where a micro city map is avail- matically corrected after the vehicle able, will change to when the receives signals from the GPS. map screen is set to the smallest scale. ●After the 12-volt battery disconnection, or on a new vehicle, the current position Micro city map may not be correct. As soon as the sys- tem receives signals from the GPS, the correct current position is displayed. For areas covered by the micro city map (some major cities), a micro city map on a scale of 75 ft. (25 m) can be selected. When the map is scaled down to 150 ft. (50 m), changes to and can be selected to display the micro city map. 1 Select on the map screen.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-1. Basic operation 65 2 Check that the micro city map is The letter(s) under this symbol indi- displayed. cate the vehicle’s heading direction (e.g. N for north).
Map scroll operation
The map can be scrolled to view loca- 3 tions that are different than your cur-
rent position. Navigation system 1 Select the desired point on the map screen. ●To return to the normal map display, select . Move the desired point on the cen- ●If the map or the current position is ter of the map screen. moved to the area which is not covered by the micro city map, the screen scale automatically changes to 150 ft. (50 m). ●On the micro city map, a one way street is displayed by . ●Scrolling the micro city map is not avail- able while driving. ●Certification Building micro cities in the database were created and provided by HERE. A Cursor mark B Distance from the current position Orientation of the map to the cursor mark The orientation of the map can be C Select to register as a memory changed between 2D north-up, 2D point. To change the icon, name, heading-up and 3D heading-up by etc.: →P.89 selecting the orientation symbol dis- D Select to set as a destination. played at the top left of the screen. (→P.79) : North-up symbol Press the “MAP” button on the Regardless of the direction of vehicle Remote Touch to return to the cur- travel, north is always up. rent position. : Heading-up symbol The direction of vehicle travel is always Flick scroll operation up. The map screen can be moved to drag : 3D Heading-up symbol or flick the touchpad on the Remote The direction of vehicle travel is always Touch. To activate drag/flick operation, up. “Map Flick” is required to be “On”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 66 3-1. Basic operation (→P.94) tion mark manually on the calibra- 1 Select the desired point on the map tion screen (→P.96) screen. 1 Select one of the 8 directional 2 Use flick or drag operations on the arrows to move the cursor to the touchpad to scroll the map. desired point and then select “OK”.
Press the button on the Remote Touch. The following buttons can be displayed. “Save”: Select to register as a memory point. To change the icon, name, etc.: →P.89 “Enter”: Select to set as a destination. “Go”: Select to delete the existing destina- tion(s) and set a new one. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination. Press the touchpad again, the switches on the display can be selected.
Adjusting location in small incre- ments
The cursor location can be adjusted in small increments. 8 directional arrows may appear in the following cases. • When “Adjust Location” is selected on the map screen • When changing the location of memory points on the editing screen (→P.89, 90, 92) • When adjusting the current posi-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-1. Basic operation 67
Map screen information 3 Select the desired POI category and select “OK”. Information such as POI icons, route trace, speed limit, etc. can be displayed on the map screen.
3 Displaying the map options
screen Navigation system
1 Select on the map screen. A Displays up to 5 selected POI 2 Select the desired items to be dis- icons on the map screen. played. B Select to cancel the selected POI icons. C Displays up to 6 POI icons as favorite POI categories. (→P.95) If a POI category is selected to be displayed on the map, its icon will be displayed above. D Select to display other POI catego- A Select to select or change POI ries if the desired POIs cannot be icons. (→P.67) found on the screen. E B Select to display the map version Select to search for the nearest → and coverage area. (→P.104) POIs. ( P.67) C Select to display speed limit icon. Selecting other POI icons to be dis- D Select to display traffic informa- played tion.* (→P.70) 1 Select “Other POIs”. E Select to display route trace. (→P.68) 2 Select the desired POI categories and select “OK”. *: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. “List All Categories”: Select to display all POI categories. Selecting the POI icons Displaying the local POI list 1 Select on the map screen. POIs that are within 20 miles (32 km) 2 Select “POI Icons”. of the current position will be listed from among the selected categories.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 68 3-1. Basic operation 1 Select “Around Me”. 2 Select “Route Trace” again. 2 Select the desired POI. 3 A confirmation screen will be dis- played. Press the button on the Remote Touch. The following buttons can be “Yes”: Select to keep the recorded route trace. displayed. “No”: Select to erase the recorded route “Near Here”: Select to search for POIs trace. near the current position. ●The traveled route can be stored up to “Along My Route”: Select to search for approximately 621 miles (1000 km). POIs along the route. 3 Check that the selected POI is dis- Switching the map mode on the played on the map screen. side display
Route trace The map mode on the side display can be changed. The traveled route can be stored and retraced on the map screen. This fea- 1 Select or to change the ture is available when the map scale is map mode. 30 miles (50 km) or less.
Start recording the route trace
1 Select on the map screen. 2 Select “Route Trace”. The route trace starts. 3 Check that the traveled line is dis- “Map”: Display the single map screen. played. “Compass”: Display the compass mode screen. (→P.69) “Freeway Exit List”: Display the freeway exit list screen. (→P.84) “Turn List”: Display the turn list screen. (→P.86) “Turn-by-Turn Arrow”: Display the turn-by-turn arrow screen. (→P.86) Depending on the conditions, cer- Stop recording the route trace tain screen configuration buttons 1 Select on the map screen. cannot be selected.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-1. Basic operation 69 → Compass name, etc.: P.89 “Go” / “Enter”: Select to set as a Information about the destination, cur- destination. rent position and a compass is dis- : Select to call the regis- played on the screen. tered number. “Delete”: Select to delete destina- ●The destination mark is displayed in the direction of the destination. When driv- tion or memory point. 3 ing, refer to the longitude and latitude “Edit”: Select to display the edit coordinates, and the compass, to make memory point screen. Navigation system sure that the vehicle is headed in the direction of the destination. ● ● Even when traffic information is not cur- When the vehicle travels out of the cov- rently being received, traffic information erage area, the guidance screen changes and “Info” will be displayed for a while to the whole compass mode screen. after traffic information has been received. Displaying information about the ●In some situations, calls to a POI may icon where the cursor is set automatically change to an international call or may not be possible as a domestic call. When the cursor is placed over an icon on the map screen, and the button Standard map icons on the Remote Touch is pressed, the name of icon is displayed. If “Info” Icon Name appears on the bottom of the name, detailed information can be displayed. Park/Recreation 1 Place the cursor over an icon. Business facility
2 Press the button on the Remote Airport Touch. Military
University
Hospital
Stadium
Shopping
3 Select “Info”. Golf course 4 Check that the information screen is displayed. “Save”: Select to register as a mem- ory point. To change the icon,
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 70 3-1. Basic operation
* ●If traffic information cannot be received Traffic information because the vehicle is outside of HD Radio coverage area, it may still be able *: This function is not made available in to be received using DCM. (→P.244) some countries or areas. Traffic data can be received via HD Displaying traffic information Radio broadcast or via DCM to dis- A list of current traffic information can play traffic information on the map be displayed along with information on screen. the location of each incident. 1 Display the traffic incidents screen: Displaying the traffic screen “MENU” button → “Info” → “Traffic 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Incidents” Remote Touch. 2 Select “Traffic Events on Current Road”, “Traffic Events on Current Route” or “Traffic Events Nearby”. 3 Select the desired traffic informa- tion.
When “Traffic Events Nearby” is selected, depending on whether the traffic flow information is enabled/disabled, the following will 2 Select “Info”. be displayed: 3 Select “Traffic Incidents”. When enabled: Traffic event and conges- tion information 4 Select the desired item. When disabled: Traffic event information “Traffic Events on Current Road”: Select to only display traffic information for the current road. (→P.70) 4 Check that the traffic information is “Traffic Events on Current Route”: Select to displayed. display traffic information for the set route. (→P.70) “Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic information. “Traffic Events Nearby”: Select to display nearby traffic information. (→P.70) “Predictive Traffic Map”: Select to display a Displaying predictive traffic map with predictive traffic data. (→P.70) information “My Traffic Routes”: Select to display traffic along the saved routes. (→P.71) A map with predictive traffic data can be displayed. ●If a large amount of information is being 1 Display the traffic incidents screen: received, it may take longer than normal for the information to be displayed on the “MENU” button → “Info” → “Traffic screen.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-1. Basic operation 71 Incidents” “Detail”: Select to display detailed traffic information. 2 Select “Predictive Traffic Map”. 3 Scroll the map to the desired point Displaying traffic information on (→P.65) and set the time of predic- the map tive traffic information. The time of the predictive traffic 1 Select on the map screen. 3 information can be changed in 2 Select “Traffic Information”.
15-minute intervals up to +45 min- 3 Check that the traffic information is Navigation system utes. displayed. “+”: Moves the time forward 15 minutes. “-”: Moves the time back 15 minutes. ●The icons indicate traffic incidents such as construction, accidents, etc. Select an icon to hear more detail by voice. My traffic routes ●The arrows indicate the flow of traffic. The color changes depending on the speed. Traffic information along the saved routes can be displayed. To use this function, it is necessary to register a route. (→P.97) 1 Display the traffic incidents screen: “MENU” button → “Info” → “Traffic Incidents” 2 Select “My Traffic Routes”. If map data has been updated, a confirmation screen will be dis- played. Select “OK” or “Do Not Tell Me Again”. 3 Select the desired route. “Options”: Select to add, edit or delete personal routes. If routes have not been registered yet, a confirmation screen will be displayed. Select “Yes” to register the route. 4 Select the desired traffic informa- tion. 5 Check that the traffic information is displayed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 72 3-2. Destination search
3-2.Destination search Destination search operation B Select to search for a destination by entering keywords. (→P.73) Destination search screen C Select to search for a destination from a registered entry in “Favor- The destination screen enables to ites”. (→P.73) search for a destination. The destina- D Select to search for a destination tion screen can be reached by the fol- * lowing methods: via the Lexus response center. (→P.338) ■ From the map screen E Select to search for a destination 1 Press the “MAP” button on the from recent set destinations. Remote Touch. (→P.74) 2 Select . F Select to search for a destination 3 Follow the steps in “From the menu from emergency service points. screen” from step 3. (→P.72) (→P.74) ■ From the menu screen G Select to search for a destination 1 Press the “MENU” button on the from contact data which had been Remote Touch. transferred to the system from a ® 2 Select “Destination”. registered Bluetooth phone. (→P.74) 3 Select the desired search method. H Select to search for a destination by address. (→P.75) I Select to search for a destination by point of interest. (→P.76) *: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.
Selecting search area
The selected state (province) can be changed to set a destination from a dif- ferent state (province) by using “Address” or “Point of Interest”. ■ From the map screen 1 Press the “MAP” button on the A Select to set a destination by home. Remote Touch. → ( P.73) 2 Select .
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-2. Destination search 73 3 Follow the steps in “From the menu overview is displayed. (→P.80) screen” from step 3. (→P.73) ■ From the menu screen Searching by keyword 1 Press the “MENU” button on the The destination can be searched by Remote Touch. entering various keywords. 2 Select “Destination”. 1 Display the destination search 3 3 Select “Address” or “Point of Inter- screen by either operation:
est”. Navigation system “MAP” button → 4 Select “Select State/Province” or “MENU” button → “Destination” “Change State/Province”. 2 Select “Search”. If a state (province) has not been selected yet, “Select State/Prov- 3 Enter characters on the keyboard. ince” is displayed. When entering characters, if a list of 5 Select the desired state (province). predicted destinations is displayed on the side display, a destination can be selected from the list. 4 Select “Search”. 5 Select the desired item from the list.
: Select to display updated information about the selected entry.
●To search for a facility name using multi- To change countries, select “United ple search words, put a space between States”, “Canada” or “Mexico”. each word. ●Search results may differ depending on the Lexus Enform subscription status and Setting home as destination communication status. To use this function, it is necessary to register a home address. (→P.89) Searching by favorites list 1 Display the destination search To use this function, it is necessary to screen by either operation: register an favorites list entry. (→P.90) “MAP” button → 1 Display the destination search screen by either operation: “MENU” button → “Destination” “MAP” button → 2 Select . “MENU” button → “Destination” The navigation system performs a search for the route and the route 2 Select “Favorites”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 74 3-2. Destination search
3 Select the desired favorites list Deleting recent destinations entry. 1 Select “Delete Recent Destina- Searching by Destination Assist* tions”.
* 2 Select the desired recent destina- : This function is not made available in tion(s) to be deleted. some countries or areas. A Destination Assist operator can Press the button on the Remote search for a destination. You can Touch. The following button can be request a specific business, address, or displayed. ask for help locating your desired des- “Delete All Recent Destinations”: Select to tination. (→P.338) delete all destinations on the list. 1 Display the destination search 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen by either operation: screen appears. “MAP” button → Searching by emergency “MENU” button → “Destination” 2 Select “Dest Assist”. 1 Display the destination search screen by either operation: Searching by recent destinations “MAP” button → → 1 Display the destination search “MENU” button “Destination” screen by either operation: 2 Select “Emergency”. “MAP” button → 3 Select the desired emergency cat- egory. “MENU” button → “Destination” 4 Select the desired destination. 2 Select “Recent”. 3 Select the desired destination. ●The navigation system does not guide in areas where route guidance is unavail- Press the button on the Remote able. (→P.102) Touch. The following button can be displayed. Searching by contact “Delete Recent Destinations”: Select to To use this function, it is necessary to delete the recent destination. (→P.74) have contact data which had been ●Up to 100 previously set destinations are transferred to the system from a regis- displayed on the screen. tered Bluetooth® phone. (→P.301) 1 Display the destination search screen by either operation:
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-2. Destination search 75
“MAP” button → Searching by city → “MENU” button “Destination” 1 Select “City”. 2 Select “Contacts”. 2 Enter a city name and select 3 Select the desired contact. “Search”. 4 Select “Addresses”. “Last 5 Cities”: Select the desired city 5 Select the desired address. name from the list of the last 5 cities. 3 3 Select the desired city name. 6 Follow the steps in “Searching by Navigation system keyword” from step 4. (→P.73) 4 Enter a street name and select “Search”. ● This function may not be available 5 Select the desired street name. depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone. 6 Enter a house number and select “Search”. Searching by address If multiple locations with the same There are 2 methods to search for a address exist, the address list screen destination by address. will be displayed. Select the desired address. 1 Display the destination search screen by either operation: Searching by street address “MAP” button → 1 Select “Street Address”. “MENU” button → “Destination” 2 Enter a house number and select 2 Select “Address”. “Search”. 3 Select the desired search method. 3 Enter a street name and select “Search”. 4 Select the desired street name. 5 Enter a city name and select “Search”. 6 Select the desired city name. If multiple locations with the same address exist, the address list screen A Select to change the search area. will be displayed. Select the desired (→P.72) address. B Select to search by city. (→P.75) C Select to search by street address. ●A street name can be searched using → only the body part of its name. ( P.75) For example: S WESTERN AVE
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 76 3-2. Destination search • A search can be performed by entering 3 Select the desired POI. “S WESTERN AVE”, “WESTERN AVE” or “WESTERN”.
Searching by point of interest
There are 3 methods to search for a destination by Points of Interest. 1 Display the destination search screen by either operation: Press the button on the Remote “MAP” button → Touch. The following buttons can be “MENU” button → “Destination” displayed. 2 Select “Point of Interest”. “Change POI category”: Select to search → 3 Select the desired search method. for POI from the category list. ( P.77) “Enter a city name”: Select to search for POI in the desired city. (→P.76) When entering the name of a spe- cific POI, and there are 2 or more sites with the same name, the list screen will be displayed. Select the desired POI.
A Select to change the search area. ●To search for a facility name using multi- ple search words, put a space between (→P.72) each word. B Select to search by name. (→P.76) C Select to search by category. Selecting a city to search (→P.77) 1 Press the button on the Remote D Select to search by phone number. Touch. (→P.77) 2 Select “Enter a city name”. 3 Enter a city name and select Searching by name “Search”. 1 Select “Name”. “Any City”: Select to cancel the city setting. 2 Enter a POI name and select 4 Select the desired city name. “Search”. 5 Select the desired POI.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-2. Destination search 77
Selecting from the categories If there is more than 1 result for the selected category, a detailed list will 1 Press the button on the Remote be displayed. Touch. “List All Categories”: Select to display all POI categories. 2 Select “Change POI category”. “Favorite POI Categories”: Select to use 3 Select the desired category. the 6 POIs that have been previously set. (→P.95) 3 If there is more than 1 result for the 4 Select the desired POI. selected category, a detailed list will Navigation system be displayed. ●The names of POIs located within “List All Categories”: Select to display all approximately 200 miles (320 km) from POI categories. the selected search point can be dis- played. They are displayed up to 200 4 Select the desired POI. names.
Searching by category When “Near a City Center in XX*” is selected 1 Select “Category”. 2 Select the desired search point. 1 Select “Near a City Center in XX*”. 2 Enter a city name and select “Search”. “Last 5 Cities”: Select the desired city name from the list of the last 5 cities. 3 Select the desired city name. 4 Select “OK” when the city center map screen is displayed. A Select to search for POIs near your current position. 5 Follow the steps in “Searching by category” from step 3. (→P.77) B Select to search for POIs along the * set route. : XX represents the selected search area name. C Select to search for POIs near a specific city center. (→P.77) ●If the navigation system has never been D Select to search for POIs near a used, selecting the city name from “Last 5 Cities” will not be available. destination. When more than 1 des- tination has been set, a list will be Searching by phone number displayed on the screen. Select the desired destination. 1 Select “Phone #”. 3 Select the desired POI category.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 78 3-2. Destination search 2 Enter a phone number and select can be registered as preset desti- “OK”. nations.) If multiple locations with the same The estimated time of arrival to the phone number exist, the list screen registered home and preset desti- will be displayed. nations from the current position will be displayed. ●If there is no match for the entered phone number, a list of identical numbers with If the home or a preset destination different area codes will be displayed. has not been registered, “Save Home” or “Save Favorite” will be One-touch setting home/favor- displayed, respectively. To register a ite as a destination home or preset destination, select the corresponding button. To use this function, it is necessary to register a home and/or a favorite loca- ●When the destination is very close to the tion. Up to 2 favorites can be regis- current position, “Nearby” will be dis- played. tered as preset destinations. (→P.89, ●The one-touch buttons for home and 90) favorites will disappear after the vehicle To set the home or a preset destination has been driven for a while. as the destination, select the corre- ●The color of the estimated arrival time indicator may change depending on the sponding button. traffic information received. 1 Turn the engine switch
A Select to set the registered home as the destination. B Select to set a registered favorite as the destination. (Up to 2 favorites
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-2. Destination search 79
with a scale more than 0.5 mile (800 m), Starting route guidance the map scale changes to 0.5 mile (800 m) automatically. If this occurs, set the When the destination is set, the destination again. ● confirm destination screen will be If a destination that is not located on a road is set, the vehicle will be guided to displayed. the point on a road nearest to the destina- tion. The road nearest to the selected point is set as the destination. 3 Starting route guidance
WARNING Navigation system 1 Select “Go” on the confirm destina- tion screen. ●Be sure to obey traffic regulations and keep road conditions in mind while driving. If a traffic sign on the road has been changed, the route guidance may not indicate such changed infor- mation.
Confirm destination screen
For details about this screen: →P.79 2 Select “OK” on the route overview screen.
A Select to adjust the position in smaller increments. (→P.66) B Select to search for the route. (→P.79) • If a destination has already been set, “Go For details about this screen: Directly” and “Add to Route” will be dis- →P.80 played. “Go Directly”: Select to delete the existing ●The route for returning may not be the destination(s) and set a new one. same as that for going. “Add to Route”: Select to add a destination ●The route guidance to the destination to the current route. may not be the shortest route or a route without traffic congestion. C Select to register as a memory ●Route guidance may not be available if point. there is no road data for the specified D Select to call the registered num- location. ber. ●When setting the destination on a map
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 80 3-2. Destination search
E Select to update information about 1 Select and hold “OK” on the route the selected entry.* overview screen until a beep sounds. *: This function is displayed only when there is information from the Lexus Press the “MAP” button on the Enform center. (→P.73) Remote Touch to end demo mode.
Route overview screen 3 routes selection
1 Select “3 Routes”. 2 Select the desired route.
A Current position B Destination point C Select to display a list of the turns A Displayed when the route dis- required to reach the destination. played is available from the Lexus → ( P.81) Enform center. ( ) D Select the desired route from 3 B Select to display the quickest route. possible routes. (→P.80) C Select to display the route that is E Select to change the route. the shortest distance to the set des- (→P.81) tination. F Type of route and its distance D Select to display the alternative G Distance of the entire route route. H Select to start guidance. Select and E Select to display the information hold to start demo mode. (→P.80) about the 3 routes. (→P.80) I Displayed when the route dis- played is from the Lexus Enform Displaying 3 routes information center. (→P.82) 1 Select “Info”. Starting demo mode
Before starting the route guidance, the demonstration of the route guidance can be viewed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-2. Destination search 81 2 Check that the 3 routes informa- appear on the list. If a road changes its tion screen is displayed. name without requiring a turn (such as on a street that runs through 2 or more cit- ies), the name change will not appear on the list. The street names will be displayed in order from the starting point, along with the distance to the next turn.
Editing route 3
Destinations can be added, reordered Navigation system or deleted, and conditions for the route A Time necessary for the entire trip to the destination can be changed. B Distance of the entire trip 1 Select “Edit Route”. C Distance of the toll road 2 Select the desired item. D Distance of the freeway E Distance of the ferry trip
Displaying turn list
A list of turn information from the cur- rent position to the destination can be displayed. A Select to add destinations. (→P.81) 1 Select “Turn List”. B Select to delete destinations. 2 Check that the turn list is displayed. (→P.82) C Select to reorder destinations. (→P.87) D Select to set route preferences. (→P.87)
Adding destinations
A Current position When the vehicle is stopped 1 Select “Add”. B Distance to the next turn 2 Search for an additional destination C Turn direction at the intersection in the same way as a destination D Select to display the map of the search. (→P.72) selected point. Up to 5 destinations can be set. ●Not all road names on the route may
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 82 3-2. Destination search 3 Select “Add Destination Here” at the position in the route which you want to add the destination.
While driving 1 Select “Add”. 2 Search for an additional destination in the same way as a destination search. (→P.72) Up to 5 destinations can be set. 3 Select “Beginning” or “End”.
Deleting destinations
1 Select “Delete”. 2 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. If more than 1 destination has been set, select the destination(s) to be deleted. (The system will recalculate route(s) to the remaining set desti- nation(s).) Press the button on the Remote Touch. The following button can be displayed. “Delete All”: Select to delete all destina- tions on the list.
A route from the Lexus Enform center*
*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. When starting route guidance or rerouting, a route can be provided automatically by the Lexus Enform center. This function is available when dynamic route setting is enabled. (→P.94)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-3. Route guidance 83
3-3.Route guidance head-up display is set to on, turn-by-turn Route guidance screen guidance arrows will be displayed on the windshield. During the route guidance, various types of guidance screens can be Distance and time to destination displayed depending on conditions. When the vehicle is on the guidance route, the route information bar dis- 3 Screen for route guidance plays the distance with the estimated
travel/arrival time to the destination. Navigation system
When the set destination is 1 1 Select the route information bar to change the display of the route information bar between the esti- mated travel time and the esti- mated arrival time.
A Distance to the next turn and an arrow indicating the turning direc- tion B Guidance route C Current position D Select to mute the voice guidance. E Route information When the set destinations are more than 1 F Select to delete destinations. (→P.23) 1 Select the route information bar. 2 Check that the list of the distance ●If the vehicle goes off the guidance route, and time is displayed. the route will be recalculated. ●For some areas, the roads have not been completely digitized in our database. For this reason, the route guidance may select a road that should not be traveled on. ●When arriving at the set destination, the destination name will be displayed on the upper part of the screen. ●When the automatic zoom function is enabled, the map will automatically By selecting one of the number but- change to a detailed map as the vehicle tons, the desired route information approaches a guidance point. (→P.94) is displayed. ●Vehicle with head-up display: When the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 84 3-3. Route guidance
“Arrival Time”: Select to display the esti- E Select to scroll to farther freeway mated arrival time. exits/rest areas. “Time to Dest.”: Select to display the esti- F Select to scroll to closer freeway mated travel time. exits/rest areas. ●When the vehicle is on the guidance G Select to display the nearest free- route, the distance measured along the way exits/rest areas from the cur- route is displayed. Travel time and arrival time are calculated based on the average rent position. speed of the specified speed limits and current traffic information. When approaching freeway exit ●When the vehicle gets off the guidance route, the arrow facing the destination is or junction displayed instead of the estimated travel/arrival time. When the vehicle approaches an exit ●The route information bar fills from left to or junction, the freeway guidance right as the vehicle progresses along the screen will be displayed on the side dis- route. play. During freeway driving
During freeway driving, the freeway information screen can be displayed on the side display. 1 Select or to display the “Freeway Exit List” screen on the side display. A Next exit or junction name B Select to hide the freeway guidance screen. • To return to the freeway guidance screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. C Distance from the current position to the exit or junction A Distance from the current position D Remaining distance bar to the guid- to the freeway exit/rest area ance point B Name of the freeway exit/rest area ●This function is available when “Intersec- C POIs that are close to a freeway tion Zoom Map” is set to on. (→P.94) exit When approaching tollgate D Select to display the selected map of the exit vicinity. When the vehicle approaches a toll-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-3. Route guidance 85 gate, the tollgate view will be displayed view, press the “MAP” button on the on the side display. Remote Touch. C Distance from the current position to the next junction D Remaining distance bar to the guid- ance point 3 ●This function is available when “Intersec-
tion Zoom Map” is set to on. (→P.94) Navigation system
A Select to hide the tollgate guidance When approaching intersection screen. When the vehicle approaches an inter- • To return to the tollgate guidance screen, press the “MAP” button on the section, the intersection guidance Remote Touch. screen will be displayed on the side dis- B Distance from the current position play. to the tollgate C Remaining distance bar to the guid- ance point
●This function is available when “Intersec- tion Zoom Map” is set to on. (→P.94)
When approaching junction A Next street name When the vehicle approaches a junc- B Select to hide the intersection guid- tion, the junction view with signage will ance screen. be displayed on the side display. • To return to the intersection guidance screen, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. C Distance to the intersection D Remaining distance bar to the guid- ance point
●This function is available when “Intersec- tion Zoom Map” is set to on. (→P.94) A Next junction or street name B Select to hide the real freeway junc- tion view. • To return to the real freeway junction
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 86 3-3. Route guidance
Turn list screen Typical voice guidance prompts 1 Select or to display the “Turn List” screen on the side dis- As the vehicle approaches an inter- play. section, or point, where maneuver- ing the vehicle is necessary, the system’s voice guidance will pro- vide various messages.
●If a voice guidance command cannot be heard, press the “MAP” button on the Remote Touch. ●To adjust the voice guidance volume: →P.57 A Turn direction ●To mute the voice guidance: →P.83 B Distance between turns ●Voice guidance may be made early or C Next street or destination name late. ●If the system cannot determine the cur- rent position correctly, you may not hear Turn-by-turn arrow screen voice guidance or may not see the mag- nified intersection on the screen. On this screen, information about the next turn on the guidance route can be WARNING displayed on the side display. ●Be sure to obey the traffic regulations and keep the road condition in mind 1 Select or to display the especially when you are driving on IPD “Turn-by-Turn Arrow” screen on the roads (roads that are not completely side display. digitized in our database). The route guidance may not have the updated information such as the direction of a one way street.
A Exit number or street name B Turn direction C Distance to the next turn
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-3. Route guidance 87
Editing route to change the arrival order. Then select “OK”. Displaying the edit route screen Selecting route type 1 Select on the map screen. 1 Select on the map screen. 2 Select the desired item to be set. 2 Select “Route Type”. 3 3 Select the desired route type. Navigation system The entire route from the starting point to the destination is displayed. (→P.80) During driving, the route guidance starts after selecting the desired route type. A Select to display the overview of the entire route. (→P.80) Setting route preferences B Select to reorder destinations. (→P.87) The conditions to determine the route C Select to change route type. can be selected from various choices (→P.87) such as freeways, toll roads, ferries, etc. D Select to set route preferences. 1 Select on the map screen. (→P.87) 2 Select “Preference”. E Select to set detours. (→P.87) 3 Select the desired route prefer- F Select to start from adjacent road. ences and select “OK”. (→P.88) ●Even if the “Freeways” route preference is 3 Check that the route overview is turned off, the route may not be able to displayed. (→P.80) avoid freeways in some cases. ●If the calculated route includes a trip by ferry, the route guidance shows a sea Reordering destinations route. After traveling by ferry, the current position may be incorrect. Upon recep- When more than 1 destination has tion of GPS signals, it is automatically been set, the arrival order of the desti- corrected. nations can be changed. Detour setting 1 Select on the map screen. 2 Select “Reorder”. During the route guidance, the route can be changed to detour around a 3 Select the desired destination and section of the route where a delay is select “Move Up” or “Move Down”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 88 3-3. Route guidance caused by road repairs, an accident, traffic jam caused by road repairs, an etc. accident, etc. 1 Select on the map screen. B This route indicates the detour sug- 2 Select “Detour”. gested by the system. ●When the vehicle is on a freeway, the 3 Select the desired detour distance. detour distance selections are 5, 15 and 25 miles (or 5, 15 and 25 km if units are in km). ●The system may not be able to calculate a detour route depending on the selected distance and surrounding road condi- tions.
Adjacent road
When a freeway and a surface road A Select to detour within 1 mile of the run in parallel, the system may show current position. the guidance route going on the free- B Select to detour within 3 miles of way while driving on the surface road, the current position. or vice versa. C Select to detour within 5 miles of If this happens, you can instantly the current position. choose the adjacent road for the route D Select to detour on the entire route. guidance. E Select to make the system search 1 Select on the map screen. for the route based on traffic con- 2 Select “Adjacent Road”. gestion information received from traffic information.* (→P.70) ●When there is no adjacent road, this screen button will not be displayed. *: This function is not made available in some countries or areas.
●This picture shows an example of how the system would guide around a delay caused by a traffic jam.
A This position indicates the location of a
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-4. Setup 89
3-4.Setup Navigation settings A Select to set home. (→P.89) B Select to set the favorites list. Home, favorites list entries, areas (→P.90) to avoid can be set as memory C Select to set areas to avoid. points. The registered points can be (→P.92) used as the destinations. (→P.72) D Select to set detailed navigation Registered areas to avoid, will be 3 settings. (→P.94) avoided when the system searches for a route. Navigation system ●When “Useful Navi. Information Set- tings” is displayed on the screen: →P.101 Displaying navigation settings screen Setting up home
1 Press the “MENU” button on the If home has been registered, that infor- Remote Touch. mation can be recalled by selecting on the destination screen. (→P.72) 1 Display the navigation settings screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Navigation” 2 Select “Home”. 3 Select the desired item to be set.
2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Navigation” on the sub menu. 4 Select the desired item to be set.
Navigation settings screen A Select to register home. (→P.89) B Select to edit home. (→P.90) C Select to delete home. (→P.90)
Registering home
1 Select “Save Home”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 90 3-4. Setup 2 Select the desired item to search 1 Display the navigation settings for the location. (→P.72) screen: 3 Select “OK” when the editing home “MENU” button → “Setup” → screen appears. “Navigation” 2 Select “Favorites”. Editing home 3 Select the desired item. 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select the desired item to be edited.
A Select to register favorites list entries. (→P.90) B Select to edit favorites list entries. A Select to edit the home name. (→P.90) (→P.91) C Select to delete favorites list B Select to set display of the home entries. (→P.92) name on/off. C Select to edit location information. Registering favorites list entries → ( P.91) 1 Select “New”. D Select to change the icon to be dis- 2 Select the desired item to search → played on the map screen. ( P.91) for the location. (→P.72) 3 Select “OK”. 3 Select “OK” when the editing favorites list screen appears. Deleting home (→P.90)
1 Select “Delete”. ●Up to 100 favorites list entries can be 2 Select “Yes” when the confirmation registered. screen appears. Editing favorites list entries
Setting up favorites list The icon, name, location and/or phone number of a registered favorites list Points on the map can be registered. entry can be edited. 1 Select “Edit”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-4. Setup 91
2 Select the desired favorites list Changing the location entry. Each time a star icon is selected, its 1 Select “Location”. color will change. Colored star 2 Scroll the map to the desired point icons indicate that the favorite is (→P.66) and select “OK”. registered to the corresponding preset destination button. Up to 2 Changing phone number 3 entries can be registered as quick favorite destinations. (→P.78) 1 Select “Phone #”. Navigation system 3 Select the desired item to be 2 Enter the phone number and select edited. “OK”.
Changing the icon 1 Select “Icon”. 2 Select the desired icon.
A Select to edit the favorites list entry name. (→P.91) B Select to set display of the favorites list entry name on/off. C Select to edit location information. “Page 1”/“Page 2”: Select to change (→P.91) pages. D Select to edit the phone number. “With Sound”: Select the desired icons with (→P.91) sound ■ E Select to change the icon to be dis- When “With Sound” is selected played on the map screen. (→P.91) A sound for some favorites list entries 4 Select “OK”. can be set. When the vehicle approaches the location of the favor- ites list entry, the selected sound will be Changing the name heard. 1 Select “Name”. 1 Select “With Sound”. 2 Enter a name and select “OK”. 2 Select the desired sound icon. : Select to play the sound.
●When “Bell (with Direction)” is selected,
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 92 3-4. Setup
select an arrow to adjust the direction A Select to register areas to avoid. and select “OK”. (→P.92) ●The bell sounds only when the vehicle approaches this point in the direction that B Select to edit areas to avoid. has been set. (→P.92) C Select to delete areas to avoid. Deleting favorites list entries (→P.93) 1 Select “Delete”. 2 Select the desired item to be Registering areas to avoid deleted. 1 Select “New”. Press the button on the Remote 2 Select the desired item to search Touch. The following button can be for the location. (→P.72) displayed. 3 Select either or to “Delete All”: Select to delete all destina- change the size of the area to be tions on the list. avoided and select “OK”. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
Setting up areas to avoid
Areas to be avoided because of traffic jams, construction work or other rea- sons can be registered as “Areas to Avoid”. 4 Select “OK” when the area to avoid 1 Display the navigation settings screen appears. screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → ●If a destination is entered in the area to avoid or the route calculation cannot be “Navigation” made without running through the area 2 Select “Areas to Avoid”. to avoid, a route passing through the area to be avoided may be shown. 3 Select the desired item. ●Up to 10 locations can be registered as points/areas to avoid.
Editing areas to avoid
The name, location and/or area size of a registered area can be edited. 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select the desired area.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-4. Setup 93
3 Select the desired item to be Deleting areas to avoid edited. 1 Select “Delete”. 2 Select the desired area to be deleted. Press the button on the Remote Touch. The following button can be 3
displayed. Navigation system “Delete All”: Select to delete all destina- A Select to edit the name of the area tions on the list. to avoid. (→P.93) 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation B Select to set display of the area to screen appears. avoid name on/off. C Select to edit area location. (→P.93) D Select to edit area size. (→P.93) E Select to set the area to avoid func- tion on/off. 4 Select “OK”.
Changing the name
1 Select “Name”. 2 Enter a name and select “OK”.
Changing the location
1 Select “Location”. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point (→P.66) and select “OK”.
Changing the area size
1 Select “Size”. 2 Select either or to change the size of the area to be avoided and select “OK”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 94 3-4. Setup
Detailed navigation settings hiding function on/off. When set to on, cer- tain screen buttons on the map screen will disappear several seconds after the Settings are available for auto hide Remote Touch has been operated. When buttons, favorite POI categories, set to off, all the screen buttons will always low fuel warning, etc. be displayed. “Low Fuel Warning Pop-up” Displaying the detailed naviga- Select to set display of low fuel warning tion settings screen on/off. (→P.95) “Unverified Roads Guidance Warn- 1 Press the “MENU” button on the ing” Remote Touch. Select to set unverified roads guidance warning on/off. “Guidance on Unverified Roads” Select to set IPD road (roads that are not completely digitized in our database) guid- ance on/off. “Guidance with Street Names” Select to set the voice guidance for the next street name on/off. 2 Select “Setup”. “Favorite POI Categories” 3 Select “Navigation” on the sub Select to set favorite POI categories that menu. are used for POI selection to display on the 4 Select “Detailed Navi. Settings”. map screen. (→P.95) 5 Select the desired items to be set. “Calibration” Select to adjust the current position mark manually or to adjust miscalculation of the distance caused by tire replacement. (→P.96) “Adaptive Route” Select to enable/disable adaptive routes. When enabled, the system will provide fre- quently used routes. Detailed navigation settings “Reset Adaptive Route” screen Select to erase adaptive route data. “Automatic Destination List Info” “Auto Hide Buttons” Select to set automatic destination list Select to set the automatic screen button information on/off. When set to on, the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-4. Setup 95 estimated time of arrival to the registered 2 Select “Low Fuel Warning Pop-up”. home and preset destinations from the cur- Each time the button is selected, rent position will be displayed. “On” and “Off” are switched. “Intersection Zoom Map” Select to set display of a guidance screen Searching gas station in low fuel on/off. warning “Automatic Zoom” 3 A nearby gas station can be selected Select to set automatic zoom function as a destination when the fuel level is Navigation system on/off. When it is enabled, as the vehicle approaches a guidance point, the map will low. change to a detailed map automatically. 1 Select “Yes” when the low fuel “State border guidance” warning appears. Select to set cross-border guidance on/off. 2 Select the desired nearby gas sta- tion. “Map Color Customization” 3 Select “Enter” to set as a destina- Select to set the map display color. tion. “Map Animation” “Info”: Select to display gas station informa- Select to set map animation on/off. tion. (→P.69) “Map Flick” Favorite POI categories (Select Select to set drag/flick operation on the map screen on/off. (→P.65) POI icons) “Dynamic Route”* Up to 6 POI icons, which are used for selecting POIs on the map screen, can Select to enable/disable routes sourced from the Lexus Enform center. (→P.82) be selected as favorites. “Restore the default settings” 1 Display the detailed navigation set- tings screen: Select to reset all setup items. “MENU” button → “Setup” → *: This function is not made available in “Navigation” → “Detailed Navi. Set- some countries or areas. tings” Low fuel warning 2 Select “Favorite POI Categories”.
When the fuel level is low, a warning message will pop up on the screen. 1 Display the detailed navigation set- tings screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Navigation” → “Detailed Navi. Set- tings”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 96 3-4. Setup 3 Select the desired category to be mark will be automatically corrected changed. by GPS signals. If GPS reception is poor due to location, the current posi- tion mark can be adjusted manually. 1 Select “Position/Direction”. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point (→P.65) and select “OK”. 3 Select an arrow to adjust the direc- tion of the current position mark “Default”: Select to set the default catego- and select “OK”. ries. 4 Select the desired POI category. Tire change calibration “List All Categories”: Select to display all POI categories. The tire change calibration function will 5 Select the desired POI icon. be used when replacing the tires. This function will adjust miscalculation 6 Select “OK”. caused by the circumference differ- ence between the old and new tires. Current position/Tire change 1 Select “Tire Change”. calibration The message appears and the quick The current position mark can be distance calibration starts automati- adjusted manually. Miscalculation of cally. the distance caused by tire replace- ment can also be adjusted. ●If this procedure is not performed when the tires are replaced, the current posi- 1 Display the detailed navigation set- tion mark may be incorrectly displayed. tings screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Navigation” → “Detailed Navi. Set- tings” 2 Select “Calibration”. 3 Select the desired item. For additional information on the accuracy of a current position: →P.102
Position/Direction calibration
When driving, the current position
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-4. Setup 97
Traffic settings*
*: This function is not made available in some countries or areas. Traffic information such as traffic congestion or traffic incident warn- ings can be made available. 3 A
Select to set specific routes (such Navigation system Displaying the traffic settings as frequently used routes) on which screen you wish to receive traffic informa- tion. (→P.97) 1 Press the “MENU” button on the B Remote Touch. Select to set the avoid traffic func- tion auto/manual. (→P.100) C Select to set the usage of traffic information for the estimated arrival time on/off. D Select to set the display of an arrow of free flowing traffic on/off. E Select to set to on/off whether to consider the predictive traffic infor- → 2 Select “Setup”. mation ( P.70) with estimated arrival time and detoured route 3 Select “Traffic” on the sub menu. search. 4 Select the desired items to be set. F Select to set traffic incident voice warning on/off. Screen for traffic settings G Select to reset all setup items.
My traffic routes
Specific routes (such as frequently used routes) on which you wish to receive traffic information can be reg- istered as “My Traffic Routes”. A route is set by defining a start point and end point, and can be adjusted by setting up to 2 preferred roads. 1 Display the traffic settings screen:
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 98 3-4. Setup “MENU” button → “Setup” → 7 Select the desired item to search “Traffic” for the location. (→P.72) 2 Select “My Traffic Routes”. 8 Select “OK”. 3 Select the desired item. 9 Confirm the route overview dis- played.
A Select to register personal routes. (→P.98) A Select the desired route from 3 → B Select to edit personal routes. possible routes. ( P.80) (→P.98) B Select to modify the route. The C Select to delete personal routes. routes can be adjusted by setting → (→P.99) preferred roads. ( P.99) 10 Select “OK”. Registering personal routes ●Up to 5 routes can be registered. 1 Select “New”. 2 Select “Name”. Editing personal routes 1 Select “Edit”. 2 Select the desired traffic route. 3 Select the desired item to be edited.
3 Enter the name and select “OK”. 4 Select “Start”. 5 Select the desired item to search for the location. (→P.72) 6 Select “End”. A Select to edit the name of the per- sonal route. (→P.98)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-4. Setup 99
B Select to edit start location. 2 Select the desired item. (→P.98) C Select to edit end location. (→P.98) D Select to see and modify the entire route. (→P.99) 3 4 Select “OK”.
5 Follow the steps in “Registering Navigation system personal routes” from step 9. A Select to add preferred roads. (→P.98) (→P.99) B Select to modify preferred roads. Deleting personal routes (→P.99) C Select to delete preferred roads. 1 Select “Delete”. (→P.100) 2 Select the desired traffic route to ■ Adding preferred roads be deleted and select “Delete”. 1 Select “Add”. 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears. 2 Scroll the map to the desired point (→P.65) and select “OK”. Setting preferred roads 3 Select “OK” to use this road. “Next”: Select to change road. “My Traffic Routes” can be adjusted by Available only when 1 preferred setting up to 2 preferred roads. road is set 1 Select “Set Preferred Roads”. 4 Select “Add Here” for the desired location. If a preferred road is already set, a second preferred road can be added anywhere between the start point, the end point and the existing preferred road. ■ Modifying preferred roads 1 Select “Modify”. 2 Select the desired preferred road to be modified if 2 preferred roads have been set.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 100 3-4. Setup 3 Scroll the map to the desired point you wish to reroute. → ( P.65) and select “OK”. C Select to not reroute when conges- 4 Select “OK” to use this road. tion information for the guidance “Next”: Select to change road. route has been received. ■ Deleting preferred roads 1 Select “Delete”. Changing the route manually 2 Select the desired preferred road When the navigation system calculates to be deleted if 2 preferred roads a new route, a confirmation screen will have been set. be displayed. “Delete All”: Select to delete all preferred 1 Select the desired item. roads on the list. “Yes”: Select to start route guidance 3 Select “Yes” when the confirmation using the new route. screen appears. “View Map”: Select to confirm the new route and current route on the map. Avoid traffic “No”: Select to continue the current 1 Display the traffic settings screen: route guidance. “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Traffic” 2 Select “Avoid Traffic”. 3 Select the desired item.
A Select to automatically change routes when congestion informa- tion of the guidance route has been received. B Select to select manually whether or not to change routes when con- gestion information of the guidance route has been received. In this mode, a screen will appear to ask if
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-4. Setup 101
Use of information accumu- lated by navigation system*
*: This function may not be available imme- diately after purchase of the vehicle. When enabled, information col- lected by the navigation system will 3 be analyzed to give advice for safe driving. Navigation system
Displaying the useful navigation information settings screen
1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Navigation” on the sub menu. 4 Select “Useful Navi. Information Settings”. 5 Select the desired items to be set.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 102 3-5. Tips for the navigation system
3-5.Tips for the navigation system GPS (Global Positioning panel may obstruct the GPS signals. System) The GPS satellites may not send sig- nals due to repairs or improvements This navigation system calculates being made to them. the current position using satellite Even when the navigation system is signals, various vehicle signals, map receiving clear GPS signals, the vehi- data, etc. However, an accurate cle position may not be shown accu- position may not be shown depend- rately or inappropriate route guidance ing on satellite conditions, road may occur in some cases. configuration, vehicle condition or other circumstances. NOTICE ●The installation of window tinting may obstruct the GPS signals. Most win- Limitations of the navigation sys- dow tinting contains some metallic content that will interfere with GPS tem signal reception of the antenna in the instrument panel. We advise against The Global Positioning System (GPS) the use of window tinting on vehicles developed and operated by the U.S. equipped with navigation systems. Department of Defense provides an accurate current position, normally Accurate current position may not using 4 or more satellites, and in some be shown in the following cases: case 3 satellites. The GPS system has a • When driving on a small angled certain level of inaccuracy. While the Y-shaped road. navigation system compensates for this • When driving on a winding road. most of the time, occasional position- • When driving on a slippery road such as ing errors of up to 300 ft. (100 m) can in sand, gravel, snow, etc. and should be expected. Generally, • When driving on a long straight road. position errors will be corrected within • When freeway and surface streets run in a few seconds. parallel. When the vehicle is not receiving sig- • After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier. nals from satellites, the unreceived • When a long route is searched during GPS mark appears on the map screen. high speed driving. When the vehicle is receiving the sig- • When driving without setting the current nals, the unreceived GPS mark does position calibration correctly. not appear on the map screen. • After repeating a change of direction by The GPS signal may be physically going forward and backward, or turning obstructed, leading to inaccurate vehi- on a turntable in a parking lot. cle position on the map screen. Tun- • When leaving a covered parking lot or nels, tall buildings, trucks, or even the parking garage. placement of objects on the instrument
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 3-5. Tips for the navigation system 103
• When a roof carrier is installed. • When a route cannot be searched. • When driving with tire chains installed. • If the route to your destination includes • When the tires are worn. gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, the route guidance may not be shown. • After replacing a tire or tires. • Your destination point might be shown • When using tires that are smaller or on the opposite side of the street. larger than the factory specifications. • When a portion of the route has regula- 3 • When the tire pressure in any of the 4 tions prohibiting the entry of the vehicle tires is not correct. that vary by time, season or other rea- Navigation system If the vehicle cannot receive GPS sons. signals, the current position can be • The road and map data stored in the adjusted manually. For information navigation system may not be complete on setting the current position cali- or may not be the latest version. bration: →P.96 After replacing a tire: →P.96 Inappropriate route guidance may occur in the following cases: ●This navigation system uses tire turning data and is designed to work with fac- • When turning at an intersection off the tory-specified tires for the vehicle. Install- designated route guidance. ing tires that are larger or smaller than the originally equipped diameter may cause • If you set more than 1 destination but skip inaccurate display of the current position. any of them, auto reroute will display a The tire pressure also affects the diame- route returning to the destination on the ter of the tires, so make sure that the tire previous route. pressure of all 4 tires is correct. • When turning at an intersection for which there is no route guidance. • When passing through an intersection for which there is no route guidance. • During auto reroute, the route guidance may not be available for the next turn to the right or left. • During high speed driving, it may take a long time for auto reroute to operate. In auto reroute, a detour route may be shown. • After auto reroute, the route may not be changed. • If an unnecessary U-turn is shown or announced. • If a location has multiple names and the system announces 1 or more of them.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 104 3-5. Tips for the navigation system
Map database version and ●For map data updates, contact your covered area Lexus dealer.
* Coverage areas and legal informa- Temporary updates of the map tion can be displayed and map data *: This function is not made available in can be updated. some countries or areas. If the map data has been provided from Map information the Lexus Enform center for any of the following areas and the map data in the 1 Select on the map screen. system is older than what has been (→P.62) provided, the displayed map will be 2 Select “Map Data”. updated temporarily: 3 Check that the map data screen is • Areas around the area displayed on displayed. the map screen (example: areas around current position) • Areas around destinations • Areas along the set route
●The updated data will temporarily be saved in the system. ●If temporary update data exceeds the available memory in the temporary map cache, the oldest data will be deleted. A Map version ●The temporary map data will disappear when the expiration date has passed. B Select to display map coverage areas. C Select to display legal information. D Expiration date of temporary updates of the map and a route from the Lexus Enform center. When “***” is displayed for the expiration date, the validity period has not yet been set for the service. The validity period will be set auto- matically. Map updates are avail- able even before the period is set. E Select to update map.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 105 Audio/visual system 4
4-1.. Basic operation 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation Quick reference...... 106 AM/FM/SXM radio ...... 167 Some basics...... 107 CD...... 168 4-2. Radio operation Video CD...... 169 AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) radio 4 ...... 112 DVD (DVD video and AVCHD™
disc) ...... 171 Audio/visual system Internet radio ...... 120 Blu-ray Disc™ (BD-Video and 4-3. Media operation BDAV) ...... 176 CD...... 121 USB memory...... 181 DVD...... 123 iPod...... 183 USB memory ...... 125 Bluetooth® audio ...... 184 iPod...... 127 SD card ...... 185 Bluetooth® audio...... 129 External devices...... 190 AUX ...... 132 Rear-DLNA...... 190 4-4. Audio/visual remote controls Rear-Miracast™...... 193 Steering switches...... 134 4-9. Rear seat entertainment system Rear Multi Operation Panel settings ...... 135 Rear seat entertainment system 4-5. Setup settings ...... 195 Audio settings...... 139 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat 4-6. Tips for operating the entertainment system audio/visual system Operating information ...... 198 Operating information...... 145 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features Rear seat entertainment system features...... 158 Some basics...... 160
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 106 4-1. Basic operation
4-1.Basic operation → Quick reference • Playing an iPod ( P.127) • Playing a Bluetooth® device → Functional overview ( P.129) •Using the AUX port (→P.132) The audio control screen can be • Using the steering wheel audio reached by the following methods: switches (→P.134)
Using the audio control switch • Using the Rear Multi Operation * 1 Press the “RADIO” or “MEDIA” Panel (→P.135) button. • Audio system settings (→P.139) * Using the Remote Touch : If equipped 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Radio” or “Media”. The audio functions can also be displayed and operated on the side display. (→P.33) ■ Control screen
■ Audio control switch
•Using the radio (→P.112) • Playing an audio CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc (→P.121) • Playing a DVD (→P.123) • Playing a USB memory (→P.125)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-1. Basic operation 107
Some basics audio/visual system on and off. The sys- tem turns on in the last mode used. Turn this knob to adjust the volume. This section describes some of the basic features of the audio/visual A function that enables automatic system. Some information may not return to the previous screen from pertain to your system. the audio/visual screen can be selected. (→P.53) Your audio/visual system works when the engine switch
●Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper- ated. ●When there are two pages, select or “PWR/VOL” knob: Press to turn the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 108 4-1. Basic operation
to change the page. (12 cm) discs only. ●When inserting a disc, gently insert the disc with the label facing up. Reordering the audio source
1 Display the audio control screen. NOTICE ●Never try to disassemble or oil any 2 Select “Source” on the sub menu. part of the DVD player. Do not insert 3 Select “Reorder”. anything other than a disc into the slot. 4 Select the desired audio source USB/AUX port then or to reorder. There are 2 USB ports and an AUX Disc slot port in the console box. 1 Push the knob and lift the armrest. ■ Inserting a disc 1 Insert a disc into the disc slot.
2 Open the cover and connect a device. After insertion, the disc is automati- cally loaded. ■ Ejecting the disc 1 Press the button and remove the disc.
Turn on the power of the device if it is not turned on.
●The AUX port only supports audio input. ●Up to two portable players can be con- nected to the USB port at the same time. ● ●The player is intended for use with 4.7 in. Even if a USB hub is used to connect more than two USB devices, only the first
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-1. Basic operation 109 two connected devices will be recog- grams usually sound better with nized. different mixes of treble, mid and bass. 1 Select “Treble/Mid/Bass” and NOTICE select the desired item to be set. ●Depending on the size and shape of the device that is connected to the sys- tem, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the device or the terminal, etc.
Sound settings 4
1 Display the audio control screen. Audio/visual system A 2 Select “Sound” on the sub menu. Select “+” or “-” to adjust high-pitched tones. 3 Select the desired item to be set. B Select “+” or “-” to adjust mid-pitched tones. C Select “+” or “-” to adjust low-pitched tones. ■ Fader/Balance A good balance of the left and right stereo channels and of the front and rear sound levels is also important. A Select to set the treble/mid/bass. (→P.109) Keep in mind that when listening to a stereo recording or broadcast, chang- B Select to set the fader/balance. ing the right/left balance will increase → ( P.109) the volume of 1 group of sounds while C The system adjusts to the optimum decreasing the volume of another. volume and tone quality according 1 Select “Fader/Balance” and select to vehicle speed to compensate for the desired item to be set. increased vehicle noise. (→P.110) D This function can create a feeling of presence. (→P.110) ■ Treble/Mid/Bass How good an audio program sounds is largely determined by the mix of the treble, mid and bass levels. In fact, dif- ferent kinds of music and vocal pro- A Select to adjust the sound balance
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 110 4-1. Basic operation between the front and rear speak- 5 Select “Screen Format”. ers. B Select to adjust the sound balance between the left and right speakers. ■ Automatic sound levelizer The system adjusts to the optimum vol- ume and tone quality according to vehicle speed to compensate for increased vehicle noise. A Select to display a 4 : 3 screen, with 1 Select to set the automatic sound either side in black. levelizer on/off. B Select to enlarge the image hori- ■ Surround zontally and vertically to full screen. This function can create a feeling of C Select to enlarge the image by the presence. same ratio horizontally and verti- Type A cally. 1 Select to set the surround on/off. ■ Color, tone, contrast and bright- ness adjustment Type B 1 Select “Surround”. The color, tone, contrast and bright- ness of the screen can be adjusted. 2 Select “3D”, “2D” or “Off”. DVD video/USB video Audio screen adjustment 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. ■ Screen size settings 2 Select “Setup”. The screen size can be selected for 3 Select “Audio” on the sub menu. each type of media. 4 Select “Common”. DVD video/USB video 5 Select “Display”. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. “Color” 2 Select “Setup”. “R”: Select to strengthen the red color of the screen. 3 Select “Audio” on the sub menu. “G”: Select to strengthen the green color 4 Select “Common”. of the screen. “Tone” “+”: Select to strengthen the tone of the screen. “-”: Select to weaken the tone of the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-1. Basic operation 111
screen. “Contrast” “+”: Select to strengthen the contrast of the screen. “-”: Select to weaken the contrast of the screen. “Brightness” “+”: Select to brighten the screen. “-”: Select to darken the screen. 4
●Depending on the audio source, some Audio/visual system functions may not be available.
Voice command system
1 Press this switch to operate the voice command system.
The voice command system and its list of commands can be operated. (→P.230)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 112 4-2. Radio operation
4-2.Radio operation AM/FM/SiriusXM (SXM) Audio control switch radio
Overview
The radio control screen can be reached by the following methods:
Using the audio control switch 1 Press the “RADIO” button.
Using the Remote Touch A Turn to step up/down frequen- 1 Press the “MENU” button on the cies/channels. Remote Touch, then select “Radio”. B Press to seek up/down. Press and hold for continuous seek. Control screen ●The radio automatically changes to ste- reo reception when a stereo broadcast is received. ●The radio automatically blends to an HD Radio signal in AM or FM where avail- able.
Presetting a station
A Displays cover art (→P.139) Radio mode has a mix preset function, which can store up to 36 stations (6 B Select to display HD) multicast stations per page x 6 pages) from any → channels available. ( P.115) of the AM, FM or SXM bands. C Displays the artist info and song 1 Tune in the desired station. title or album and genre. Select to 2 Select and hold “(Add New)”. change the displayed information. Displays messages when available from RBDS. (→P.114) D Select to tune to preset sta- tions/channels. (→P.112) E Displays items on the channels reg- istered to smart favorites. (→P.118)
To change the preset station to a dif- ferent one, select and hold the pre-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-2. Radio operation 113 set station. incoming phone call, the system will When “(Add New)” is selected, a automatically cache the interrupted confirmation message appears. portion and perform time-shift play- Select “Yes” and select “OK”. back when the interruption ends. This function is available when “Auto Pause” ●The number of preset radio stations dis- is set to on. (→P.114) played on the screen can be changed. ■ (→P.139) Playing back the cache manually The broadcast cached in the program Sub menu cache can be played back manually. 4 1 Select “Radio Replay” on the sub
menu. Audio/visual system 2 Select the desired cache radio operation button.
A Select to display the audio source selection screen. (→P.107) B Select to display the preset station screen. A Displays the replay offset from the C Select to display the cache radio current time control screen. (→P.113) B Skips backward 2 minutes D Select to display a list of receivable (AM/FM) stations. (→P.114) Select to change the track (SXM) E Select to display the radio options C Fast rewinds continuously screen. (→P.114) D Pauses the playback (To restart, F Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.109) select ) E Fast forwards continuously Caching a radio program F Skips forward 2 minutes (AM/FM) Select to change the track (SXM) A radio program can be cached and played back in a time-shifted manner. G Returns to the live radio broadcast ■ Automatic playback of the cache ●The system can store up to 20 minutes of If the radio broadcast is interrupted by AM/FM and less than 60 minutes of SXM. Cached data will be erased when another audio output, such as an the radio mode or station is changed or
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 114 4-2. Radio operation when the audio system is turned off. 2 Select the desired item to be set. ●AM/FM: If noise or silence occurs during the caching process, cache writing will continue, with the noise or silence recorded as is. In this case, the cached broadcast will contain the noise or silence when played back.
Selecting a station from the list
1 Select “Station List” on the sub menu. A Select to automatic playback of the cache on/off. 2 Select “AM”, “FM” or “SXM”. B When “SXM Tune Start” is turned Select the desired program genre on, the current song is played from when the genre selection screen is the beginning when you select the displayed. channel. 3 Select the desired station. C Select to turn digital AM Radio ■ Refreshing the station list mode on/off. (AM/FM) D Select to turn digital FM Radio 1 Select on the station list screen mode on/off. and the following screen buttons E Analog FM only: Select to display will be displayed. RBDS text messages. “Cancel Refresh”: Select to cancel the F Select to scan for receivable sta- refresh. tions. (Type scan in case SXM is “Source”: Select to change to another current program type/channel cat- audio source while refreshing. egory.)
●The audio system sound is muted during refresh operation. Radio broadcast data system ●In some situations, it may take some time This audio system is equipped with to update the station list. Radio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS). RBDS mode allows text mes- Radio options sages to be received from radio sta- 1 Select “Options” on the sub menu. tions that utilize RBDS transmitters. When RBDS is on, the radio can do the following functions. • Only selecting stations of a particu- lar program type • Displaying messages from radio sta-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-2. Radio operation 115 tions the broadcast are displayed on the • Searching for a stronger signal sta- radio screen, such as album cover tion art and station logos. RBDS features are available only when ■ listening to an FM station that broad- Certification casts RBDS information and the “FM Info” function is on. (→P.114)
Using HD Radio™ technology 4 HD Radio™ Technology is the digital evolution of analog AM/FM radio. Audio/visual system HD Radio Technology manufactured under Your radio product has a special license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. receiver which allows it to receive digi- U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and tal broadcasts (where available) in the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logos are pro- prietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital addition to the analog broadcasts it Corp. already receives. Digital broadcasts have better sound quality than analog Available HD Radio™ technol- broadcasts as digital broadcasts pro- ogy vide free, crystal clear audio with no static or distortion. For more informa- ■ Multicast tion, and a guide to available radio sta- On the FM radio frequency most digi- tions and programming, refer to tal stations have “multiple” or supple- www.hdradio.com. mental programs on one FM station. HD Radio features included in Lexus 1 Select the “HD)” logo. radios: Digital Sound HD Radio broadcasts deliver crystal-clear, digital audio quality to listeners. HD2/HD3 Channels FM stations can provide additional digital only audio programming with expanded content and format choices on 2 Select the desired channel. HD2/HD3 channels. Turning the “TUNE” knob can also PSD Program Service Data (PSD) select the desired multicast channel. gives you on-screen information such as artist name and song title. Artist Experience Images related to
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 116 4-2. Radio operation
Troubleshooting guide Cause: Data service issue by the radio broadcaster. ■ Experience Action: Broadcaster should be notified. Mismatch of time alignment- a user Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ may hear a short period of pro- report_radio_station_experiences. gramming replayed or an echo, stut- ter or skip. No text information shown for the present selected frequency. Cause: The radio stations analog and digi- tal volume is not properly aligned or the Cause: Data service issue by the radio station is in ballgame mode. broadcaster. Action: None, radio broadcast issue. A Action: Broadcaster should be notified. user can contact the radio station. Complete the form: www.ibiquity.com/automotive/ Sound fades, blending in and out. report_radio_station_experiences. Cause: Radio is shifting between analog and digital audio. How to subscribe to SiriusXM Action: Reception issue, may clear-up as Satellite Radio the vehicle continues to be driven. Turning the indicator of the “HD Radio AM” and To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in “HD Radio FM” button off can force radio the vehicle, a subscription to the Siri- in an analog audio. usXM Satellite Radio service is neces- Audio mute condition when an sary. HD2/HD3 multicast channel had A SiriusXM Satellite Radio is a tuner been playing. designed exclusively to receive broad- Cause: The radio does not have access to casts provided under a separate sub- digital signals at the moment. scription. Availability is limited to the Action: This is normal behavior, wait until 48 contiguous U.S. states and some the digital signal returns. If out of the cover- Canadian provinces. age area, seek a new station. ■ How to subscribe Audio mute delay when selecting an HD2/HD3 multicast channel pre- It is necessary to enter into a separate set. service agreement with SiriusXM Sat- ellite Radio in order to receive satellite Cause: The digital multicast content is not broadcast programming in the vehicle. available until HD Radio™ broadcast can Additional activation and service sub- be decoded and make the audio available. This takes up to 7 seconds. scription fees apply that are not included in the purchase price of the Action: This is normal behavior, wait for the audio to become available. vehicle and digital satellite tuner. Text information does not match the For complete information on sub- present song audio. scription rates and terms, or to sub-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-2. Radio operation 117 scribe to SiriusXM Satellite Radio: Visit www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-447-0011 U.S.A. Canadian Customers: Visit www.siriusxm.ca or call Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-877-438-9677 1-877-447-0011. ●SiriusXM Satellite Radio is solely respon- Canada sible for the quality, availability and con- tent of the satellite radio services Refer to www.siriusxm.ca or call provided, which are subject to the terms 1-877-438-9677. and conditions of the SiriusXM Satellite Radio customer service agreement. ● ● Customers should have their radio ID SiriusXM Radio Services Descriptions ready; the radio ID can be found by tun- 4 • Radio and Entertainment SiriusXM offers more than 170 satellite ing to “Ch 000” on the radio. For details, → Audio/visual system radio channels of commercial-free music see ( P.118). and premier sports, news, talk, and enter- ●All fees and programming are the tainment. SiriusXM is broadcast via satel- responsibility of SiriusXM Satellite Radio lites to millions of listeners across the and are subject to change. continental United States. SiriusXM sub- scribers listen to SiriusXM on satellite NOTICE radio receivers for the car, home, and portable use. More information about ●SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services SiriusXM is available online at Legal Disclaimers and Warnings www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or www.siriusxm.ca (Canada). • Fees and Taxes Subscription fee, taxes, one time activation fee, and other fees ●SiriusXM Radio Services Subscription may apply. Subscription fee is con- Instructions sumer only. All fees and programming • For SiriusXM Services requiring a sub- subject to change. scription (such as SiriusXM Satellite Subscriptions subject to Customer Radio), the following paragraph shall be Agreement available at included. www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or Required SiriusXM Radio monthly sub- www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) SiriusXM scriptions sold separately after trial service only available in the 48 contig- period. Subscription fee is consumer uous United States and Canada. only. All fees and programming subject to Explicit Language Notice Channels change. Subscriptions are subject to the with frequent explicit language are Customer Agreement available at indicated with an “XL” preceding the www.siriusxm.com (U.S.A.) or channel name. Channel blocking is www.siriusxm.ca (Canada) XM service available for SiriusXM Satellite Radio only available in the 48 contiguous receivers by notifying SiriusXM at: United States and 10 Canadian prov- U.S.A. Customers: Visit inces. © 2011 Sirius XM Radio Inc. Sirius, www.siriusxm.com or calling XM and all related marks and logos are 1-877-447-0011 trademarks of Sirius XM Radio Inc. All Canadian Customers: Visit other marks, channel names and logos www.siriusxm.ca or calling are the property of their respective own- 1-877-438-9677 ers. For more information, program sched- ules, and to subscribe or extend subscrip- tion after complimentary trial period; more information is available at: U.S.A. Customers:
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 118 4-2. Radio operation
NOTICE unique radio ID. The radio ID is required when activating an SiriusXM ●It is prohibited to copy, decompile, dis- assemble, reverse engineer, hack, Satellite service or when reporting a manipulate, or otherwise make avail- problem. able any technology or software incor- porated in receivers compatible with If “Ch 000” is selected using the the SiriusXM Satellite Radio System or “TUNE” knob, the ID code, which is that support the XM website, the 8 alphanumeric characters, will be Online Service or any of its content. displayed. If another channel is Furthermore, the AMBE® voice com- pression software included in this selected, the ID code will no longer product is protected by intellectual be displayed. The channel (000) property rights including patent rights, alternates between displaying the copyrights, and trade secrets of Digital Voice Systems, Inc. radio ID and the specific radio code. ●Note: this applies to SiriusXM Satellite Radio receivers only and not XM Smart favorites Ready devices. Up to 20 channels can be registered ■ Satellite tuner technology notice as presets in the cache. For channel Lexus’s satellite radio tuners are registration, refer to (→P.139). awarded Type Approval Certificates 1 Select channels registered to smart from SiriusXM Satellite Radio Inc. as favorites. proof of compatibility with the services 2 Select “Radio Replay” on the sub offered by SiriusXM Satellite Radio. menu.
● Satellite tuner ●Caches the latest less than 30 minutes The tuner supports only Audio Services for each channel. (Music and Talk) and the accompanying ●The radio plays the track from start when Text Information of XM® Satellite Radio. that track has not previously been heard by the user and the station is registered as Displaying the radio ID smart favorite. ●Displays icons on the channels registered Each SiriusXM tuner is identified with a to smart favorites. (→P.112)
If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions
When problems occur with the SXM tuner, a message will appear on the screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested corrective action.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-2. Radio operation 119
Message Explanation The SXM antenna is not connected. Check whether the SXM antenna cable is attached securely. Contact your Lexus certified dealer for assis- “Check tance. Antenna” A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antenna cable. Contact your Lexus certified dealer for assistance. The SXM signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until your vehi- “No Signal” cle reaches a location with a stronger signal. “Chan Unavail- The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming. Select 4 able” another channel. The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2 sec- Audio/visual system “Ch Unsub- onds until the radio returns to the previous channel or “Ch 001”. If it does scribed” not change automatically, select another channel. “Subscription Subscription is updated. Select “OK” to clear this message. Updated”
●Contact the SiriusXM Listener Care Center at 1-877-447-0011 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-438-9677 (Canada).
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 120 4-2. Radio operation
Internet radio
One of Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0’s features is the ability to listen to internet radio. In order to use this service, a compatible phone and the system needs to be set up. For details: →P.335
Listening to internet radio
1 Display the audio source selection screen. 2 Select the desired application screen button. The internet radio application screen is displayed. Perform operations according to the displayed application screen. For the instrument panel operation method and the Remote Touch operation method: →P.107
●Other applications can be activated while listening to internet radio. ●Some parts of applications can be adjusted using the switches on the steer- ing wheel. ●For additional information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call 1-800-255-3987.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-3. Media operation 121
4-3.Media operation CD MP3/WMA/AAC disc
Overview
The CD control screen can be reached by the following methods:
Using the audio control switch 1 Press the “MEDIA” button.
Using the Remote Touch A Displays cover art 4 1 Press the “MENU” button on the B Select to change the folder. Remote Touch, then select “Media”. Audio/visual system C Select to set repeat playback. → Inserting a disc ( P.108) (→P.121) D Select to change the file. Control screen Select and hold to fast rewind. Audio CD E Select to play/pause. F Select to change the file. Select and hold to fast forward. G Select to set random playback. (→P.122)
Repeating
The track/file or folder currently being A Displays cover art listened to can be repeated. B Select to set repeat playback. 1 Select . (→P.121) C Select to change the track. ●Each time is selected, the mode Select and hold to fast rewind. changes as follows: D Audio CD Select to play/pause. • track repeat → off E Select to change the track. MP3/WMA/AAC disc *1 Select and hold to fast forward. • file repeat → folder repeat → off • file repeat → off*2 F Select to set random playback. *1: When random playback is off (→P.122) *2: When random playback is on
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 122 4-3. Media operation
Random order Sub menu
Tracks/files or folders can be automati- Audio CD cally and randomly selected. 1 Select .
●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: Audio CD • random (1 disc random) → off MP3/WMA/AAC disc • random (1 folder random) → folder ran- dom (all folder random) → off A Select to display the audio source selection screen. (→P.107) Audio control switch B Select to return to the control screen. C Select to display the track list screen. D Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.109)
MP3/WMA/AAC disc
A Turn to select a track/file. B Press to select a track/file. Press and hold to fast for- ward/rewind.
●If a disc contains CD-DA files and MP3/WMA/AAC files, only the CD-DA A Select to display the audio source files can be played back. selection screen. (→P.107) ●If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title of the disc and track will be displayed. B Select to return to the control screen. C Select to display a file list screen. D Select to display a browse list. E Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.109)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-3. Media operation 123
DVD Control screen
For safety reasons, the DVD video discs can only be viewed when the following conditions are met: (a) The vehicle is completely stopped. (b) The engine switch
key. Audio/visual system (c) The parking brake is applied. B Select to display the menu screen. While driving in DVD video mode, C Select to change the chapter. only the DVD’s audio can be heard. Select and hold to fast rewind. The playback condition of some D Select to stop the video screen. DVD discs may be determined by E Select to play/pause. the DVD software producer. This F DVD player plays a disc as the soft- Select to change the chapter. ware producer intended. As such, • During playback: Select and hold to fast forward. some functions may not work prop- • During a pause: Select and hold to slow erly. Be sure to read the instruction forward. manual that comes with the individ- G Select to display expanded screen ual DVD disc. (→P.146) video.
Overview Audio control switch The DVD control screen can be reached by the following methods:
Using the audio control switch 1 Press the “MEDIA” button.
Using the Remote Touch 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media”. Inserting a disc (→P.108) A Turn to select a chapter. B Press to select a chapter. Press and hold to fast for-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 124 4-3. Media operation
ward/rewind. E Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.109) ●According to the DVD disc, some menu items can be selected directly. (For details, see the manual that comes with DVD options the DVD disc provided separately.) 1 Select “Options” on the sub menu. ●If appears on the screen when a con- trol is selected, the operation relevant to 2 The following screen is displayed. the control is not permitted.
WARNING ●Conversational speech on some DVDs is recorded at a low volume to emphasize the impact of sound effects. If you adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maxi- mum volume level that the DVD will play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or when you change to a A Select to display expanded screen different audio source. The louder sounds may have a significant impact video. on the human body or pose a driving B Select to change the audio lan- hazard. Keep this in mind when you → adjust the volume. guage. ( P.124) C Select to change the subtitle lan- Sub menu guage. (→P.124) D Select to display the predeter- mined scene on the screen and start playing. E Select to change the angle. (→P.125) F Select to display the title search screen. (→P.125) ■ Changing the audio language A Select to display the audio source selection screen. (→P.107) 1 Select “Audio”. B Select to return to the control Each time “Audio” is selected, the screen. audio language is changed. C Select to display the option screen. ●The languages available are restricted to (→P.124) those available on the DVD disc. D Select to display the key code input ■ Changing the subtitle language screen. 1 Select “Subtitle”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-3. Media operation 125
2 Each time “Change” is selected, the USB memory language the subtitles are dis- played in is changed. Overview ● The languages available are restricted to The USB memory control screen can those available on the DVD disc. be reached by the following methods: ●When “Hide” is selected, the subtitles can be hidden. Using the audio control switch ■ Changing the angle 1 Press the “MEDIA” button. The angle can be selected for discs Using the Remote Touch 4 that are multi-angle compatible when 1 Press the “MENU” button on the the angle mark ( ) appears on the Remote Touch, then select “Media”. Audio/visual system screen. Connecting a USB memory 1 Select “Angle”. (→P.108) Each time “Angle” is selected, the angle is changed. Control screen
USB audio ●The angles available are restricted to those available on the DVD disc. ■ Searching by title 1 Select “Search”. 2 Enter the title number and select “OK”. The player starts playing video for that title number. A Displays cover art B Select to change the artist. C Select to change the folder/album. D Select to set repeat playback. (→P.126) E Select to change the file/track. Select and hold to fast rewind. F Select to play/pause. G Select to change the file/track. Select and hold to fast forward. H Select to set random playback. (→P.126)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 126 4-3. Media operation
USB video automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select “Browse” on the sub menu. 1 Select . 2 Select “Videos”. 3 Select the desired folder and file. ●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • random (1 folder/album random) → folder/album random (all folder/album random) → off
Audio control switch
A Select to change the folder. B Select to change the file. Select and hold to fast rewind. C Select to play/pause. D Select to change the file. Select and hold to fast forward. A Turn to select a file/track. E Select to display expanded screen B Press to select a file/track. video. Press and hold to fast for- ward/rewind. Repeating ●If tag information exists, the file/folder The file/track or folder/album cur- names will be changed to track/album rently being listened to can be names. repeated. WARNING 1 Select . ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the USB memory while driv- ●Each time is selected, the mode ing. changes as follows: When random playback is off • file/track repeat → folder/album repeat NOTICE → off ●Depending on the size and shape of When random playback is on the USB memory that is connected to • file/track repeat → off the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly Random order close the console box as this may dam- age the USB memory or the terminal, etc. Files/tracks or folders/albums can be
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-3. Media operation 127
NOTICE iPod ●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high tempera- Overview tures inside the vehicle may damage the portable player. The iPod control screen can be ●Do not push down on or apply unnec- reached by the following methods: essary pressure to the portable player while it is connected as this may dam- Using the audio control switch age the portable player or its terminal. 1 Press the “MEDIA” button. ● Do not insert foreign objects into the Using the Remote Touch port as this may damage the portable 4 player or its terminal. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch, then select “Media”. Audio/visual system Sub menu Connecting an iPod (→P.108)
Control screen
A Select to display the audio source selection screen. (→P.107) B Select to return to the control A Displays cover art screen. B Select to change the artist. C Select to display a song list screen. C Select to change the album. D Select to display the play mode D Select to change the playlist. selection screen. E Select to set repeat playback. E Select to display the sound setting (→P.128) → screen. ( P.109) F Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast rewind. G Select to play/pause. H Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast forward. I Select to set random playback. (→P.128)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 128 4-3. Media operation
B Press to select a track. ●Some functions may not be available depending on the type of model. Press and hold to fast for- ward/rewind. Repeating ●When an iPod is connected using a genu- The track currently being listened to ine iPod cable, the iPod starts charging its can be repeated. battery. ●Depending on the iPod and the songs in 1 Select . the iPod, iPod cover art may be displayed. This function can be changed to “On” or “Off”. (→P.139) It may take time to dis- ●Each time is selected, the mode play iPod cover art, and the iPod may not changes as follows: be operated while the cover art display is in process. When shuffle is off (iPhone 5 or later) • track repeat → album repeat → off ●When an iPod is connected and the audio source is changed to iPod mode, the iPod When shuffle is off (iPhone 4s or earlier) • track repeat → off will resume playing from the same point it was last used. When shuffle is on ● • track repeat → off Depending on the iPod that is connected to the system, certain functions may not be available. Random order ●If an iPhone is connected via Bluetooth® and USB at the same time, system opera- Tracks or albums can be automatically tion may become unstable. For known and randomly selected. phone compatibility information, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. 1 Select . ●The system may not function properly if a conversion adapter is used to connect a ●Each time is selected, the mode device. changes as follows: •shuffle (1 album shuffle) → album shuffle WARNING (all album shuffle) → off ●Do not operate the player’s controls or connect the iPod while driving. Audio control switch
NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the iPod that is connected to the sys- tem, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the iPod or the terminal, etc. ●Do not leave your portable player in the car. In particular, high tempera- tures inside the vehicle may damage A Turn to select a track. the portable player.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-3. Media operation 129
NOTICE Bluetooth® audio ●Do not push down on or apply unnec- essary pressure to the portable player ® while it is connected as this may dam- The Bluetooth audio system age the portable player or its terminal. enables users to enjoy listening to music that is played on a portable ●Do not insert foreign objects into the port as this may damage the portable player on the vehicle speakers via player or its terminal. wireless communication. This audio system supports Sub menu Bluetooth®, a wireless data system 4 capable of playing portable audio music without cables. If your device Audio/visual system does not support Bluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audio system will not function.
Overview A Select to display the audio source ® selection screen. (→P.107) The Bluetooth audio control screen can be reached by the following meth- B Select to return to the control ods: screen. Using the audio control switch C Select to display a song list screen. 1 Press the “MEDIA” button. D Select to display the play mode Using the Remote Touch selection screen. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the E Select to display the sound setting Remote Touch, then select “Media”. screen. (→P.109) Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device (→P.131)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 130 4-3. Media operation
Control screen Random order
Tracks or albums can be automatically and randomly selected. 1 Select .
●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • random (1 album random) → album ran- dom (all album random) → off A Displays cover art B Select to change the album. Audio control switch C Select to set repeat playback. (→P.130) D Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast rewind. E Select to play/pause. F Select to change the track. Select and hold to fast forward. G Select to set random playback. A Turn to select a track. (→P.130) B Press to select a track. ●Depending on the type of portable player Press and hold to fast for- connected, some functions may not be ward/rewind. available and/or the screen may look dif- ferently than shown in this manual. ●Depending on the Bluetooth® device that is connected to the system, the music Repeating may start playing when selecting The track or album currently being lis- while it is paused. Conversely, the music tened to can be repeated. may pause when selecting while it is playing. 1 Select . ●In the following conditions, the system may not function: ® ●Each time is selected, the mode • The Bluetooth device is turned off. ® changes as follows: • The Bluetooth device is not connected. ® When random playback is off • The Bluetooth device has a low battery. • track repeat → album repeat → off ● ® When random playback is on When using the Bluetooth audio and • track repeat → off Wi-Fi® Hotspot functions at the same time, the following problems may occur: • It may take longer than normal to con-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-3. Media operation 131
® nect to the Bluetooth device. ●Before using Bluetooth® devices, •The sound may cut out. users of any electrical medical device ●It may take time to connect the phone other than implantable cardiac pace- when Bluetooth® audio is being played. makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable ●For operating the portable player, see the cardioverter defibrillators should con- instruction manual that comes with it. sult the manufacturer of the device for ●If the Bluetooth® device is disconnected information about its operation under due to poor reception from the the influence of radio waves. Radio ® waves could have unexpected effects Bluetooth network when the engine on the operation of such medical switch
Selecting a registered device 1 Select “Connect” on the sub menu. 2 Select the device to be connected.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 132 4-3. Media operation
Sub menu AUX
Overview
The AUX control screen can be reached by the following methods:
Using the audio control switch 1 Press the “MEDIA” button.
Using the Remote Touch A Select to display the audio source 1 Press the “MENU” button on the → selection screen. ( P.107) Remote Touch, then select “Media”. B Select to return to the control Connecting a device to the AUX screen. port (→P.108) C Select to display a song list screen. D Select to display the play mode Control screen selection screen. E Select to display the portable device connection screen. F Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.109)
WARNING ●Do not connect portable audio device or operate the controls while driving.
NOTICE ●Depending on the size and shape of the portable audio device that is con- nected to the system, the console box may not close fully. In this case, do not forcibly close the console box as this may damage the portable audio device or the terminal, etc.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-3. Media operation 133
NOTICE ●Do not leave portable audio device in the vehicle. The temperature inside the vehicle may become high, resulting in damage to the player. ●Do not push down on or apply unnec- essary pressure to the portable audio device while it is connected as this may damage the portable audio device or its terminal. ●Do not insert foreign objects into the 4 port as this may damage the portable
audio device or its terminal. Audio/visual system
Sub menu
A Select to display the audio source selection screen. (→P.107) B Select to return to the control screen. C Select to display the sound setting screen. (→P.109)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 134 4-4. Audio/visual remote controls
4-4.Audio/visual remote controls Steering switches Mode Operation/function CD, Press: Change audio Steering switch operation MP3/WMA/ modes AAC disc, Some parts of the audio/visual system DVD, USB, can be adjusted using the switches on iPod, Press and hold (0.8 sec. or the steering wheel. Bluetooth® more): Pause audio, APPS
*: If cashed radio is enabled, pressing and holding the “MODE” switch pauses the broadcast. (Press and hold again to play back the cashed radio program.) C “< >” switch
Mode Operation/function Press: Preset station A Volume control switch up/down Mode Operation/function Press and hold (0.8 sec. or AM, FM, HD more): Seek up/down Press: Volume up/down Press and hold (1.5 sec. or All Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Seek up/down con- more): Volume up/down tinuously while the switch is continuously being pressed Press: Preset channel B “MODE” switch up/down Mode Operation/function Press and hold (0.8 sec. or Press: Change audio more): Seek for stations in the relevant program modes SXM type/channel category AM, FM, Press and hold (0.8 sec. or Press and hold (1.5 sec. or SXM more): Mute* (Press and more): Seek for the chan- hold again to resume the nel while the switch is sound.) being pressed Press: Change audio Press: Track up/down modes AUX Press and hold (0.8 sec. or Press and hold (0.8 sec. or CD more): Fast for- more): Mute ward/rewind
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-4. Audio/visual remote controls 135
Mode Operation/function Rear Multi Operation Panel* Press: File up/down *: If equipped MP3/WMA/ Press and hold (0.8 sec. or Some parts of the audio/visual sys- AAC disc more): Fast for- ward/rewind tem can be adjusted using the switches on the Rear Multi Opera- Press: Chapter up/down tion Panel. DVD Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Fast for- Displaying the audio operation ward/rewind 4 screen Press: File/Track up/down Audio/visual system USB Press and hold (0.8 sec. or 1 Press on the rear seat more): Fast for- ward/rewind armrest. Press: Track up/down
iPod Press and hold (0.8 sec. or more): Fast for- ward/rewind Press: Track up/down ® Bluetooth Press and hold (0.8 sec. or audio more): Fast for- ward/rewind 2 Touch “Audio”. ●In the APPS mode, some operation may be done on the screen depend on the selected APPS.
3 Vehicle with the rear seat entertain- ment system: Touch “Front”. 4 Check that the front audio/visual control screen is displayed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 136 4-4. Audio/visual remote controls
Vehicle without the rear seat enter- 2 Touch the desired source. tainment system
Operation buttons A Audio system on/off B Selecting an audio source AM, FM C Volume control Operation button Operation/function D Operation button Press: Tune the fre- • Buttons appropriate for the selected quency up/down source will be displayed. Press and hold (0.8 Vehicle with the rear seat entertain- sec. or more): Seek ment system up/down “< Tune >” Press and hold (1.5 sec. or more): Seek up/down continu- ously while the switch is being pressed Press: Preset station “< CH >” up/down
A Audio system on/off B Selecting an audio source C Volume control D Operation button • Buttons appropriate for the selected source will be displayed.
Selecting an audio source
1 Touch “Source”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-4. Audio/visual remote controls 137
SXM USB (Music)
Operation button Operation/function Operation button Operation/function Press: Tune the Press: File/Track channel up/down up/down “< File/Track >” Press and hold (0.8 Press and hold: Fast sec. or more): Seek forward/rewind for channels Press: Folder/Album “< Tune >” Press and hold (1.5 “< Folder/Album >” up/down sec. or more): Seek for channels contin- USB (Video) 4 uously while the
switch is being Operation button Operation/function Audio/visual system pressed Press: File up/down Press: Preset chan- “< File >” Press and hold: Fast “< CH >” nel up/down forward/rewind
CD iPod
Operation button Operation/function Operation button Operation/function Press: Track Press: Track up/down up/down “< Track >” “< Track >” Press and hold: Fast Press and hold: Fast forward/rewind forward/rewind
® MP3/WMA/AAC disc Bluetooth audio
Operation button Operation/function Operation button Operation/function Press: File up/down Press: Track “< File >” Press and hold: Fast up/down “< Track >” forward/rewind Press and hold: Fast Press: Folder forward/rewind “< Folder >” up/down Press: Album “< Album >” up/down DVD
Operation button Operation/function Press: Chapter up/down “< Chapter >” Press and hold: Fast forward/rewind
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 138 4-4. Audio/visual remote controls
Apps 3 Check that the audio operation shortcut buttons is displayed. Operation button Operation/function Press: Tune up/down Press and hold: Seek “< Tune >” up/down continu- ously Press: Channel “< CH >” up/down
●In the APPS mode, some operation may A Hides the shortcut buttons be done on the screen depend on the selected APPS. B Volume control C Operation button Audio operation shortcut but- • Buttons appropriate for the selected tons source will be displayed. • For details about shortcut buttons: →P.136 1 Press on the rear seat armrest.
2 Touch .
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-5. Setup 139
4-5.Setup Audio settings Common settings 1 Display the audio settings screen: Detailed audio settings can be pro- → → grammed. “MENU” button “Setup” “Audio” Displaying the audio settings 2 Select “Common”. screen 3 Select the desired item to be set.
1 Press the “MENU” button on the 4 Remote Touch. Audio/visual system
A Select to set the cover art display on/off. B Select to prioritize the display of 2 Select “Setup”. information from the Gracenote database. 3 Select “Audio” on the sub menu. C Select to change the screen size.*1 4 Select the desired item to be set. (→P.110) D Audio settings screen Select to display the image quality adjustment screen.*1 (→P.110) E Select to lock the system so pas- sengers in the rear seats cannot operate the rear seat entertain- ment system.*2 *1: Only in DVD video or USB video mode. *2: Vehicle with the rear seat entertainment system A Select to set the common settings. → ( P.139) Radio settings B Select to set the radio settings. (→P.139) 1 Display the audio settings screen: → → C Select to set detailed DVD settings. “MENU” button “Setup” (→P.140) “Audio”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 140 4-5. Setup 2 Select “Radio”. 2 Select the button with the desired 3 Select the desired item to be set. number to be displayed.
A Edit smart favorites. (→P.140) DVD settings B Select to change the number of 1 Display the audio settings screen: preset radio stations displayed on the screen. (→P.140) “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Audio” Manage smart favorites 2 Select “DVD”.
1 Select “Manage Smart Favorites”. 3 Select the desired items to be set. 2 Select the desired channel to be set.
●Displays the registered preset channels. ●Up to 20 channels can be registered.
Setting the number of radio presets
1 Select “Number of Radio Presets”. A Select to change the audio lan- guage. (→P.141) B Select to change the subtitle lan- guage. (→P.141) C Select to change the language of the DVD video menu. (→P.141)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-5. Setup 141
D Select to set the angle mark on/off. If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, E Select to set the parental level. select “Other” and enter a language (→P.141) code. (→P.141) F Select to set the auto start playback on/off. Parental level Discs that are inserted while the vehicle is in motion will automati- 1 Select “Parental Level”. cally start playing. Certain discs 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code. may not play. 3 Select a parental level (1-8). 4 G Select to set a dynamic range.
(→P.141) Audio/visual system Sound dynamic range H Select to initialize all menus. The difference between the lowest vol- Audio language ume and the highest volume can be adjusted. 1 Select “Audio Language”. 1 Select “Sound Dynamic Range”. 2 Select the desired language to be 2 Select “MAX”, “MID” or “MIN”. heard. If the desired language to be heard Enter audio/subtitle/menu language cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language If “Other” on the “Audio Language” code. (→P.141) screen, “Subtitle Language” screen or “Menu Language” screen is selected, the desired language to be heard or Subtitle language read can be selected by entering a lan- 1 Select “Subtitle Language”. guage code. 2 Select the desired language to be 1 Enter the 4-digit language code. read. 2 Select “OK”. If the desired language to be read cannot be found on this screen, Language codes list select “Other” and enter a language code. (→P.141) Code Language 0514 English Menu language 1001 Japanese 1 Select “Menu Language”. 0618 French 2 Select the desired language to be 0405 German read.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 142 4-5. Setup
Code Language Code Language 0920 Italian 0401 Danish 0519 Spanish 0426 Bhutani 2608 Chinese 0515 Esperanto 1412 Dutch 0520 Estonian 1620 Portuguese 0521 Basque 1922 Swedish 0601 Persian 1821 Russian 0609 Finnish 1115 Korean 0610 Fiji 0512 Greek 0615 Faroese 0101 Afar 0625 Frisian 0102 Abkhazian 0701 Irish 0106 Afrikaans 0704 Scottish-Gaelic 0113 Amharic 0712 Galician 0118 Arabic 0714 Guarani 0119 Assamese 0721 Gujarati 0125 Aymara 0801 Hausa 0126 Azerbaijani 0809 Hindi 0201 Bashkir 0818 Croatian 0205 Belorussian 0821 Hungarian 0207 Bulgarian 0825 Armenian 0208 Bihari 0901 Interlingua 0209 Bislama 0905 Interlingue 0214 Bengali, Bangla 0911 Inupiak 0215 Tibetan 0914 Indonesian 0218 Breton 0919 Icelandic 0301 Catalan 0921 Inuktitut 0315 Corsican 0923 Hebrew 0319 Czech 1009 Yiddish 0325 Welsh 1023 Javanese
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-5. Setup 143
Code Language Code Language 1101 Georgian 1601 Punjabi 1111 Kazakh 1612 Polish 1112 Greenlandic 1619 Pashto, Pushto 1113 Cambodian 1721 Quechua 1114 Kannada 1813 Rhaeto-Romance 1119 Kashmiri 1814 Kirundi 1121 Kurdish 1815 Romanian 4
1125 Kirghiz 1823 Kinyarwanda Audio/visual system 1201 Latin 1901 Sanskrit 1214 Lingala 1904 Sindhi 1215 Laotian 1907 Sango 1220 Lithuanian 1908 Serbo-Croatian 1222 Latvian, Lettish 1909 Sinhalese 1307 Malagasy 1911 Slovak 1309 Maori 1912 Slovenian 1311 Macedonian 1913 Samoan 1312 Malayalam 1914 Shona 1314 Mongolian 1915 Somali 1315 Moldavian 1917 Albanian 1318 Marathi 1918 Serbian 1319 Malay 1919 Siswati 1320 Maltese 1920 Sesotho 1325 Burmese 1921 Sundanese 1401 Nauru 1923 Swahili 1405 Nepali 2001 Tamil 1415 Norwegian 2005 Telugu 1503 Occitan 2007 Tajik 1513 (Afan) Oromo 2008 Thai 1518 Oriya 2009 Tigrinya
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 144 4-5. Setup
Code Language 2011 Turkmen 2012 Tagalog 2014 Setswana 2015 Tongan 2018 Turkish 2019 Tsonga 2020 Tatar 2023 Twi 2107 Uighur 2111 Ukrainian 2118 Urdu 2126 Uzbek 2209 Vietnamese 2215 Volapük 2315 Wolof 2408 Xhosa 2515 Yoruba 2601 Zhuang 2621 Zulu
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system 145
4-6.Tips for operating the audio/visual system Operating information from the radio transmitter. They are often accompanied by distortion. Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, ●The use of a cellular phone inside or near the vehicle may cause a noise from the making it possible for 2 signals to reach speakers of the audio/visual system the vehicle’s antenna at the same time. which you are listening to. However, this If this happens, the signals will cancel does not indicate a malfunction. each other out, causing a momentary NOTICE flutter or loss of reception. ● Static and fluttering: These occur when To avoid damage to the audio/visual 4 system: signals are blocked by buildings, trees or other large objects. Increasing the
• Be careful not to spill beverages over Audio/visual system the audio/visual system. bass level may reduce static and flut- • Do not put anything other than an tering. appropriate disc into the disc slot. Station swapping: If the FM signal being listened to is interrupted or Radio weakened, and there is another strong station nearby on the FM band, the Usually, a problem with radio reception radio may tune in the second station does not mean there is a problem with until the original signal can be picked the radio ⎯ it is just the normal result up again. of conditions outside the vehicle. ■ AM For example, nearby buildings and ter- rain can interfere with FM reception. Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected Power lines or phone wires can inter- by the upper atmosphere ⎯ especially fere with AM signals. And of course, at night. These reflected signals can radio signals have a limited range. The interfere with those received directly farther the vehicle is from a station, the from the radio station, causing the weaker its signal will be. In addition, radio station to sound alternately reception conditions change con- strong and weak. stantly as the vehicle moves. Station interference: When a reflected Here, some common reception prob- signal and a signal received directly lems that probably do not indicate a from a radio station are very nearly the problem with the radio are described. same frequency, they can interfere with each other, making it difficult to hear ■ FM the broadcast. Fading and drifting stations: Generally, Static: AM is easily affected by external the effective range of FM is about 25 sources of electrical noise, such as high miles (40 km). Once outside this tension power lines, lightening or elec- range, you may notice fading and drift- trical motors. This results in static. ing, which increase with the distance
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 146 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system ■ SiriusXM Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier, especially metal objects, may adversely affect the reception of SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Alternation or modifications car- Audio CDs ried out without appropriate autho- rization may invalidate the user’s right to operate the equipment.
DVD player and disc
This DVD player is intended for use DVD with 4.7 in. (12 cm). discs only. video discs Extremely high temperatures can keep the DVD player from working. On hot days, use the air condition- ing system to cool the inside of the DVD-R/R vehicle before using the player. W discs Bumpy roads or other vibrations may make the DVD player skip. If moisture gets into the DVD player, Use only discs marked as shown the discs may not be able to be above. The following products may played. Remove the discs from the not be playable on your player: player and wait until it dries. •SACD •dts CD WARNING • Copy-protected CD ●The DVD player uses an invisible laser beam which could cause hazardous •DVD-Audio radiation exposure if directed outside the unit. Be sure to operate the player •Video CD correctly. •DVD-RAM ■ DVD player DVD logo is a trademark of DVD For- mat/Logo Licensing Corporation.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system 147
Special shaped discs NOTICE ●Do not use special shaped, transpar- ent/translucent, low quality or labeled discs such as those shown in the illus- trations. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impos- sible to eject the disc. ●This system is not designed for use of Dual Discs. Do not use Dual Discs because they may cause damage to the player. 4 Transparent/translucent discs ●Do not use discs with a protection ring.
The use of such discs may damage the Audio/visual system player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc. ●Do not use printable discs. The use of such discs may damage the player, or it may be impossible to eject the disc.
Low quality discs
Handle discs carefully, especially when inserting them. Hold them on the edge and do not bend them. Avoid getting fingerprints on them, Labeled discs particularly on the shiny side. Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes or other disc damage could cause the player to skip or to repeat a sec- tion of a track. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc up to the light.) Remove discs from the players when not in use. Store them in their plastic cases away from moisture, heat and direct sunlight.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 148 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system to play some damaged discs. If you insert a CD-RW disc into the player, playback will begin more slowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc. Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW can- not be played using the DDCD (Double Density CD) system. To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free ■ DVD video discs cloth that has been dampened with water. Wipe in a straight line from the center to the This DVD player conforms to edge of the disc (not in circles). Dry it with NTSC/PAL color TV formats. DVD another soft, lint-free cloth. Do not use a video discs conforming to another for- conventional record cleaner or anti-static mat such as SECAM cannot be used. device. Region codes: Some DVD video discs ■ CD-R/RW and DVD-R/RW discs have the following region code indicat- CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not ing which countries the DVD video been subject to the “finalizing pro- disc can be played in on this DVD cess” (a process that allows discs to player. If you attempt to play an inap- be played on a conventional CD propriate DVD video disc on this player) cannot be played. player, error message appears on the It may not be possible to play screen. Even if the DVD video disc CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a does not have a region code, there are music CD recorder or a personal cases when it cannot be used. computer because of disc charac- Code Country teristics, scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on ALL All countries the lens of the unit. 1 North America It may not be possible to play discs Marks shown on DVD video discs recorded on a personal computer depending on the application set- Indicates NTSC/PAL format of tings and the environment. Record color TV. with the correct format. (For details, contact the appropriate application manufacturers of the applications.) Indicates the number of audio tracks. CD-R/CD-RW discs may be dam- aged by direct exposure to sunlight, high temperatures or other storage conditions. The unit may be unable
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system 149 a level of restrictions of the country. Indicates the number of lan- The level of restrictions varies depend- guage subtitles. ing on the DVD video disc. Some DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or violent scenes are skipped or replaced Indicates the number of angles. with other scenes. Level 1: DVD video discs for chil- dren can be played. Indicates the screen to be selected. Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for chil- 4 Wide screen: 16:9 dren and G-rated movie can be Standard: 4:3 played. Audio/visual system Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs can be played. Indicates a region code by which this video disc can be Multi-angle feature: The same scene played. can be enjoyed from different angles. “ALL”: in all countries Multi-language feature: The subtitle Number: region code and audio language can be selected. Region codes: The region codes are ■ DVD video disc glossary provided on DVD players and DVD DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc discs. If the DVD video disc does not that holds video. DVD video discs have have the same region code as the DVD adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world player, you cannot play the disc on the standards of digital compression tech- DVD player. For region codes: nologies. The picture data is com- (→P.148) pressed by 1/40 on average and Audio: This DVD player can play linear stored. Variable rate encoded technol- PCM, Dolby Digital and MPEG audio ogy in which the volume of data format DVDs. Other decoded types assigned to the picture is changed cannot be played. depending on the picture format has also been adopted. Audio data is Title and chapter: Video and audio pro- stored using PCM and Dolby Digital, grams stored in DVD video discs are which enables higher quality of sound. divided into parts by title and chapter. Furthermore, multi-angle and Title: The largest unit of the video and multi-language features will also help audio programs stored on DVD video users enjoy the more advanced tech- discs. Usually, one movie, one album, nology of DVD video. or one audio program is assigned as a Viewer restrictions: This feature limits title. what can be viewed in conformity with Chapter: A unit smaller than that of
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 150 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system title. A title comprises of several chap- SE, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone ters. 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPod touch (5th and 6th generation), and iPod ■ Certification nano (7th generation). ● Manufactured under license from Dolby The 30-pin connector works with Laboratories. Dolby, Dolby Audio, Pro Logic, and the double-D symbol are iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 4th generation), iPod clas- iPod sic, and iPod nano (1st through 6th generation). ■ Certification USB works with iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone SE, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, iPhone, iPod touch (1st through 6th genera- tion), iPod classic, and iPod nano (1st through 7th generation). “Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone” mean that an electronic Bluetooth® technology works with accessory has been designed to iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone connect specifically to iPod or SE, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6, iPhone iPhone, respectively, and has been 5s, iPhone 5c, iPhone 5, iPhone 4S, certified by the developer to meet iPhone 4, iPhone 3GS, iPhone 3G, Apple performance standards. iPhone, iPod touch (2nd through Apple is not responsible for the 6th generation) and iPod nano (7th operation of this device or its com- generation). pliance with safety and regulatory ■ Compatible models standards. Please note that the use ® ® of this accessory with iPod or The following iPod , iPod nano , iPod ® ® ® iPhone, may affect wireless perfor- classic , iPod touch and iPhone mance. devices can be used with this system. iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod Made for nano, and iPod touch are trade- • iPod touch (6th generation) marks of Apple Inc., registered in • iPod touch (5th generation) the U.S. and other countries. Light- • iPod touch (4th generation) ning is a trademark of Apple Inc. • iPod touch (3rd generation) • iPod touch (2nd generation) The Lightning connector works with • iPod touch (1st generation) iPhone 6s Plus, iPhone 6s, iPhone • iPod nano (7th generation)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system 151 • iPod nano (6th generation) ■ Playable media • iPod nano (5th generation) USB • iPod nano (4th generation) •iPhone SE File information •iPhone 6s Plus •iPhone 6s • iPhone 6 Plus Compatible USB devices •iPhone 6 •iPhone 5s USB communica- USB 2.0 HS (480 tion formats Mbps) •iPhone 5c 4 •iPhone 5 File formats FAT 16/32 •iPhone 4s Correspondence Audio/visual system Mass storage class •iPhone 4 class •iPhone 3GS •iPhone 3G Compatible audio format ●This system only supports audio play- back. Compatible compressed files ●Depending on difference between mod- els or software versions etc., some mod- ■ Compatible file format (audio) els might be incompatible with this system. USB DISC • iPod classic • iPod with video MP3/WMA/AAC/ • iPod nano (3rd generation) WAV(LPCM)/ • iPod nano (2nd generation) MP3/WMA/AAC • iPod nano (1st generation) FLAC/ALAC/ •iPhone OGG Vorbis ■ Compatible file format (video) High-resolution sound source USB DISC This device supports high-resolution sound sources. WMV/AVI/MP4/M ⎯ 4V The definition of high-resolution is based on the standards of groups such ■ Folders in the device as the CTA (Consumer Technology USB DISC Association). Maximum Maximum Supported formats and playable media 3000 192 are as follows. ■ Supported formats WAV, FLAC, ALAC, OGG Vorbis
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 152 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
■ Files in the device File type Frequency (kHz) USB DISC 8/11.025/12/16/ 22.05/24/32/ Maximum Maximum *2 ALAC 44.1/48/64/88.2/ 9999 255 96 ■ Files per folder *2 8/11.025/16/ OGG Vorbis 22.05/32/44.1/48 USB DISC *1: Only compatible with Windows Media Maximum ⎯ 255 Audio Standard *2: Sound source of 48kHz or more is down-converted to 48kHz/24bit. Corresponding sampling frequency
*1 File type Frequency (kHz) Corresponding bit rates MP3 files: 32/44.1/48 File type Bit rate (kbps) MPEG 1 LAYER 3 MP3 files: MP3 files: 32 - 320 MPEG 1 LAYER 3 MPEG 2 LSF 16/22.05/24 LAYER 3 MP3 files: MPEG 2 LSF 8 - 160 WMA files: LAYER 3 Ver. 7, 8, 9*1 32/44.1/48 (9.1/9.2) WMA files: Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 - 192 11.025/12/16/ WMA files: AAC files: CBR 48 - 320 22.05/24/32/ Ver. 9*2 (9.1/9.2) MPEG4/AAC-LC 44.1/48 AAC files: 8 - 320 8/11.025/12/16/ MPEG4/AAC-LC WAV (LPCM) 22.05/24/32/ OGG Vorbis 32-500 files*2 44.1/48/88.2/96/ 176.4/192 *1: Variable Bit Rate (VBR) compatible 8/11.025/12/16/ *2: Only compatible with Windows Media *2 22.05/24/32/ Audio Standard FLAC 44.1/48/88.2/96/ Quantization bit 176.4/192 File type rate (bit) WAV (LPCM) files FLAC 16/24 ALAC
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system 153
Compatible channel modes session/border compatible discs. MP3 files are compatible with the File type Channel mode ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2 and Stereo, joint stereo, Ver. 2.3 formats. This system cannot MP3 files dual channel and display disc title, track title and artist monaural name in other formats. WMA files 2ch WMA/AAC files can contain a 1ch, 2ch (Dual chan- WMA/AAC tag that is used in the AAC files nel is not supported) same way as an ID3 tag. WMA/AAC tags carry information 4 WAV (LPCM) such as track title and artist name. /FLAC/ALAC/ 2ch Audio/visual system OGG Vorbis The emphasis function is available only when playing MP3 files. MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) and This system can play back AAC files AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) encoded by iTunes. are audio compression standards. The sound quality of MP3/WMA This system can play files generally improves with higher MP3/WMA/AAC files on bit rates. In order to achieve a rea- CD-R/CD-RW/DVD-R/DVD-RW sonable level of sound quality, discs discs and USB memory. recorded with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are recommended. This system can play disc recordings compatible with ISO 9660 level 1 m3u playlists are not compatible and level 2 and with the Romeo and with the audio player. Joliet file system and UDF (2.01 or MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3- lower). PRO formats are not compatible When naming an with the audio player. MP3/WMA/AAC file, add an The player is compatible with VBR appropriate file extension (Variable Bit Rate). (.mp3/.wma/.m4a). When playing back files recorded This system plays back files with as VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the .mp3/.wma/.m4a file extensions as play time will not be correctly dis- MP3/WMA/AAC files respectively. played if the fast forward or reverse To prevent noise and playback operations are used. errors, use the appropriate file It is not possible to check folders extension. that do not include This system can play only the first MP3/WMA/AAC files. session/border when using multi MP3/WMA/AAC files in folders up
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 154 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
to 8 levels deep can be played. Compatible video format However, the start of playback may be delayed when using discs con- Format Codec taining numerous levels of folders. Video codec: For this reason, we recommend cre- • H.264/MPEG-4 ating discs with no more than 2 lev- AVC els of folders. • MPEG4 Audio codec: • AAC • MP3 MPEG-4 Corresponding screen size: • MAX 1920×1080 Corresponding frame rate: The play order of the compact disc • MAX 60i/30p with the structure shown above is as follows:
The order changes depending on the personal computer and MP3/WMA/AAC encoding soft- ware you use.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system 155
Format Codec on-demand to CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is written to Video codec: floppy or hard discs. • H.264/MPEG-4 AVC ■ ID3 tag • MPEG4 This is a method of embedding • WMV9 track-related information in an MP3 • WMV9 Advanced profile file. This embedded information can include the track number, track title, Audio codec: the artist’s name, the album title, the • AAC music genre, the year of production, 4 AVI Container • MP3 • comments, cover art and other data. WMA9.2 Audio/visual system (7,8,9.1,9.2) The contents can be freely edited Corresponding using software with ID3 tag editing screen size: functions. Although the tags are • MAX restricted to a number of charac- 1920×1080 ters, the information can be viewed Corresponding when the track is played back. frame rate: ■ WMA tag • MAX 60i/30p WMA files can contain a WMA tag Video codec: that is used in the same way as an • WMV9 ID3 tag. WMA tags carry informa- • WMV9 Advanced profile tion such as track title and artist name. Audio codec: • WMA9.2 ■ ISO 9660 format Windows Media (7,8,9.1,9.2) This is the international standard for Video Corresponding the formatting of CD-ROM folders screen size: and files. For the ISO 9660 format, • MAX there are 2 levels of regulations. 1920×1080 Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 for- Corresponding frame rate: mat (8 character file names, with a 3 • MAX 60i/30p character file extension. File names must be composed of one-byte cap- ital letters and numbers. The “_” Terms symbol may also be included.) ■ Packet write Level 2: The file name can have up This is a general term that describes to 31 characters (including the sep- the process of writing data aration mark “.” and file extension). Each folder must contain fewer than
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 156 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system
8 hierarchies. Error messages ■ MP3 ■ CD/DVD MP3 is an audio compression stan- dard determined by a working Message Explanation group (MPEG) of the ISO (Interna- It indicates that the tional Standard Organization). MP3 disc is dirty, dam- compresses audio data to about aged, or it was 1/10 the size of that on conventional inserted upside discs. down. Clean the “Check Disc” disc or insert it cor- ■ WMA rectly. WMA (Windows Media Audio) is It indicates a disc an audio compression format devel- which is not playable oped by Microsoft®. It compresses is inserted. files into a size smaller than that of There is a trouble MP3 files. The decoding formats for “DISC Error” inside the system. WMA files are Ver. 7, 8 and 9. Eject the disc. This product is protected by certain It indicates that the “Region Code intellectual property rights of Micro- DVD region code is Error” soft Corporation and third parties. not set properly. Use or distribution of such technol- ■ ogy outside of this product is pro- USB hibited without a license from Message Explanation Microsoft or an authorized Micro- This indicates a soft subsidiary and third parties. problem in the USB “USB Error” ■ AAC memory or its con- nection. AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an audio com- This indicates that no pression technology standard used “No music files MP3/WMA/AAC with MPEG2 and MPEG4. found.” files are included in the USB memory. This indicates that “No video files no video files are found.” included in the USB memory.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-6. Tips for operating the audio/visual system 157 ■ iPod
Message Explanation This indicates a “iPod Error.” problem in the iPod or its connection. This indicates that “No music files there is no music found.” data in the iPod. This indicates that 4 the software version “Please check the
is not compatible. Audio/visual system iPod firmware ver- Perform the iPod sion.” firmware updates and try again. This indicates that it failed to authorize “Unable to autho- the iPod. rize the iPod.” Please check your iPod.
■ Bluetooth® audio
Message Explanation
“Music tracks not This indicates a supported. Please problem in the check your portable ® player.” Bluetooth device.
●If the malfunction is not rectified: Take your vehicle to your Lexus dealer.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 158 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features
4-7.Rear seat entertainment system features Rear seat entertainment sys- tem features*
*:If equipped The rear seat entertainment system is designed for the rear passengers to enjoy video such as Blu-ray Disc™ (BD) and DVD disc sepa- rately from the front audio/visual system. The system can be used when the engine switch
Function index
The following operations can be per- formed: Using the Rear Multi Operation Panel (→P.160) Inserting media or connecting a device to the rear player (→P.164) Selecting the sound mode (→P.165) Operating the rear seat entertain- ment system from the front seats (→P.166) Video playback restriction for the rear displays (→P.166) Rear seat entertainment system operation (→P.167) Rear seat entertainment system set- tings (→P.195) Tips for operating the rear seat entertainment system (→P.198)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features 159
Overview
4 Audio/visual system
A Front audio/visual system B Rear display C Rear player D Rear Multi Operation Panel E Headphone volume control dials and headphone jacks F A/V input port (HDMI port)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 160 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features
Some basics 4 Check that the rear seat entertain- ment system control screen is dis- played. Rear Multi Operation Panel
The rear seat entertainment system can be operated using the buttons on the Rear Multi Operation Panel. The system cannot be operated by touching the switches on the rear dis- play directly. A Touch to display the front Display the rear seat entertain- audio/visual system control screen. ment system control screen (→P.135) B Touch to display the rear left side 1 Press on the rear seat display control screen. armrest. C Touch to display the rear right side display control screen. D Touch to turn on/off the rear seat entertainment system. (→P.160) E Touch to display the audio/visual source selection screen. (→P.162) F Touch to display the advanced audio/visual operation screen. (→P.161) 2 Touch “Audio”. G Displays the operation buttons • Buttons appropriate for the selected source will be displayed. H Touch to return to the Home screen.
Turning on/off the rear seat enter- tainment system 3 Touch “Rear Left” or “Rear Right”. 1 Display the rear seat entertain- ment system control screen. (→P.160) 2 Touch “Rear Left” or “Rear Right”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features 161
3 Touch . Operation screen
●The rear seat entertainment system can be turned on/off on the front audio/visual system screen. (→P.166)
Using the advanced audio/visual operation screen
1 Display the rear seat entertain- ment system control screen. A Displays the operation buttons 4 (→P.160) • Buttons appropriate for the selected
source will be displayed. Audio/visual system 2 Touch “Rear Left” or “Rear Right”. Directional pad screen 3 Touch “Advanced”. 4 Check that the following screen is displayed and touch the desired button.
A Touch to select and change settings displayed on the rear display. B Touch to display the menu screen for each audio source on the rear A Touch to display the settings display. screen. (→P.195) Key pad screen (BD-Video only) B Touch to select the sound mode. (→P.165) C Touch to select the operation screen.
A Touch to enter numerals.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 162 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features
Screen angle adjustment screen 5 Touch “Rear Menu”.
A Touch to adjust the angle of the rear 6 Select an audio source using “∧”, displays. “∨”, “<”, “>” buttons and select “Enter” on the directional pad WARNING screen. ●When adjusting the angle of the rear display, be careful not to catch a hand, etc. on the rear display as doing so may cause an injury or the rear display to malfunction.
NOTICE ●Do not attempt to move the rear dis- play by hand, as doing so may damage the rear display. ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel 1 Display the rear seat entertain- Selecting an audio source ment system control screen. (→P.160) Different media sources can be selected for the rear right and left side 2 Touch “Rear Left” or “Rear Right”. displays, respectively. 3 Touch “Source”. ■ Rear display 4 Touch the desired source. 1 Display the rear seat entertain- ment system control screen. (→P.160) 2 Touch “Rear Left” or “Rear Right”. 3 Touch “Advanced”. 4 Touch .
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features 163
Audio/ Available front audio/ Available rear audio/ Page visual source visual source visual source AM/ FM/ “AM”, “FM”, “SXM” ⎯ 167 SXM Internet radio “Apps” ⎯ ⎯ Audio CD MP3/ “DISC” 168 WMA/ 4 AAC disc
“Rear-DISC” Audio/visual system Video CD ⎯ 169 DVD “DISC” 171 Blu-ray Disc™ ⎯ 176 USB audio/ “iPod/USB” (Device ⎯ 181 video name) “iPod2/USB2” iPod audio (Device name) ⎯ 183
Bluetooth® audio “Bluetooth*” ⎯ 184 SD audio/ video/ ⎯ “Rear-SD” 185 picture AUX, HDMI “AUX” “Rear-HDMI” 190 DLNA ⎯ “Rear-DLNA” 190 Miracast™ ⎯ “Rear-Miracast™” 193
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of ●The following sources cannot be used if a Bluetooth SIG, Inc. device is connected via Bluetooth® to the front audio system for the hands-free ●If the selected source is currently being system or another function. received or played on the front •Rear-DLNA audio/visual system, the same content will •Rear-Miracast™ be output by the rear seat entertainment ●Wi-Fi® and Bluetooth® based sources system. cannot be used simultaneously for the left ●The following sources cannot be used and right rear display. separately for the left and right rear dis- play: •Rear-Disc •Rear-SD •Rear-DLNA • Rear-Miracast™
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 164 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features
NOTICE Ejecting a disc ●Wi-Fi® connections and Bluetooth® connections cannot be used simulta- 1 Press the button and remove neously, as they may cause interfer- the disc. ence with each other. For example, a device cannot be connected to the rear seat entertainment system for the rear-DLNA or rear-Miracast™ func- tion if another device is connected to the front audio system as a Bluetooth® audio device or for the hands-free sys- tem.
Inserting media or connecting a device to the rear player ●If the ejected disc remains in the slot for 15 seconds, the player will automatically Disc slot reload the disc.
NOTICE Loading a disc ●If a disc cannot be ejected, do not forc- 1 Insert the disc into the slot with the ibly take out the disc. Keep pressing label side up. the button for approximately 10 seconds and release it.
SD card slot
Inserting an SD card
1 Open the cover.
The player will start to play the disc automatically.
2 Insert the SD card with the label side up, positioning the cut off cor- ner to the right.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features 165
A/V input port (HDMI)
1 Open the cover and connect audio/visual equipment to the A/V input port.
3 After inserting the SD card, push it straight in until you hear a click. 4 Audio/visual system Ejecting an SD card
1 Open the cover. 2 Push on the center of the SD card. Selecting the sound mode 3 When it is ejected slightly, pull it straight out. Headphone mode To listen to the rear seat entertainment system, use headphones.
A Headphones jack • Connect a pair of headphones to the jack. B Volume knob • Push and then turn clockwise/counter- clockwise to increase/decrease the vol- ume.
Speaker mode
Sound from the rear seat entertain-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 166 4-7. Rear seat entertainment system features ment system can be output through the tainment system on/off. speakers. B Select to lock the system so pas- ■ Rear display sengers in the rear seats cannot operate the rear seat entertain- 1 Select . ment system. C Select to play the rear seat enter- tainment system over the speakers in the vehicle. Select “Right” or “Left” to select for which screen sound will be output.
Video playback restriction for ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel the rear displays 1 Display the advanced audio/visual operation screen. (→P.161) While the vehicle is in motion, if the front passenger seat is determined to 2 Touch . be in a position where the driver can view the rear display, a warning mes- ●The sound mode can be changed from sage will be displayed on the rear dis- the front seat. (→P.166) plays. To resume video playback, move the front passenger seat to a position Operating the rear seat enter- where the rear display is not visible to tainment system from the front the driver. seats
1 Display the audio control screen. (→P.106) 2 Select “Source”. 3 Select “Rear”. 4 Select the desired button.
A Select to turn the rear seat enter-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 167
4-8.Rear seat entertainment system operation AM/FM/SXM radio D Touch to select a preset sta- tion/channel. The radio operation screen can be *: Cache radio only reached by the following method: →P.162 Caching a radio program
1 Select . Overview
■ Rear display 4 Audio/visual system
2 Select the desired item.
A Select to display the cache radio operation buttons. (→P.167) ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel
Operation screen
A Hides the cache operation buttons. B Select to return to the live radio broadcast.
A Touch to skip forward/rewind 2 minutes.* Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind continuously.* B Touch to play/pause.* C Touch to select a station/channel. Touch and hold to seek for receiv- able stations/channels.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 168 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
MP3/WMA/AAC disc CD •random (1 folder random) → folder ran- dom (all folder random) → off Audio CD and MP3/WMA/AAC ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel discs can be played on this system. Operation screen (Audio CD) The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.162 Inserting a disc The front player: →P.108 The rear player: →P.164
Overview A Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind. ■ Rear display B Touch to play/pause. C Touch to select a track. Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind.* *:Rear-CD only
Operation screen (MP3/WMA/AAC disc) A Select to set repeat playback. B Select to set random playback.
●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: Audio CD • track repeat → off MP3/WMA/AAC disc → → *1 •file repeat folder repeat off A •file repeat → off*2 Touch and hold to fast for- *1: When random playback is off ward/rewind. B *2: When random playback is on Touch to play/pause. C Touch to select a file. ●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: Touch and hold to fast for- Audio CD ward/rewind.* • random (1 disc random) → off D Touch to select a folder.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 169
* :Rear-CD only Video CD
The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.162 Inserting a disc The rear player: →P.164
Overview 4
■ Rear Multi Operation Panel Audio/visual system
Operation screen
A Touch and hold to fast rewind. B Touch to play/pause. C During playback: Touch and hold to fast forward. During a pause: Touch and hold to slow forward. D Touch to select a track. Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind. E Select to stop.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 170 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
Directional pad screen E Select to play/pause. F During playback: Select and hold to fast forward. During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward. G Select to change the desired con- tent using numbers. (→P.170) H Select to return to a predetermined A Touch to display the option screen. scene. (→P.170) I Select to change the page. J Select to change the audio channel. Video CD options (→P.170) 1 Touch “Options” on the directional pad screen. Select the desired content using numbers 2 Check that the following screen is displayed. 1 Select “Select Number”. 2 Enter the title number and select “OK”. The player starts playing video for that title number.
Changing the audio channel
The audio channel can be changed for discs with multiple audio channels. 1 Select “Main/Sub”. 2 Each time “Main/Sub” is selected, the mode changes in the following order: “Main”: Main audio channel “Sub”: Sub audio channel A Select to turn off the option screen. “Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio B Select to display the next or previ- channels ous page. C Select and hold to fast rewind. D Select to stop.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 171
*1 DVD (DVD video and : Rear-DVD only *2: DVD video only AVCHD™ disc) Directional pad screen The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.162 Inserting a disc The front player: →P.108 The rear player: →P.164 4 Audio/visual system A Touch to display the option screen. Overview (→P.171) ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel
Operation screen DVD video options 1 Touch “Options” on the directional pad screen. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed.
A Touch and hold to fast rewind. B Touch to play/pause. C During playback: Touch and hold to fast forward. During a pause: Touch and hold to slow forward. D Touch to select a chapter. Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind.*1 E Select to stop. F Touch to display the top menu screen. A Select to display the initial setup screen. (→P.172) G Touch to display the menu B Select to turn off the option screen. screen.*2
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 172 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
C Select to display the next or previ- 2 Select the items to be set. ous page. D Select to display the top menu screen. E Select to display the menu screen. F Select and hold to fast rewind. G Select to stop. H Select to play/pause. I During playback: Select and hold to fast forward. During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward. J Select to search for a title. (→P.174) K Select to return to a predetermined scene. A Select to change the initial audio L Select to change the audio lan- language. (→P.173) → guage. ( P.174) B Select to change the initial subtitle M Select to change the subtitle lan- language. (→P.173) → guage. ( P.174) C Select to change the initial lan- N Select to change the angle. guage of the disc menu. (→P.173) → ( P.174) D Select to set the angle mark on/off. E Select to set the parental lock. Initial setup (→P.173) ■ When “DISC” is selected F Select to set a dynamic range. 1 Select “Setup”. (→P.174) G Select to initialize all menus. 3 Select “OK”. ■ When “Rear-DISC” is selected 1 Select “Setup”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 173
2 Select the items to be set. J Select to set the BD-Video second- ary audio. K Select to initialize all menus. 3 Select “OK”.
Audio language
1 Select “Audio Language”. 2 Select the desired language to be 4 heard.
If the desired language to be heard Audio/visual system cannot be found on this screen, select “Other” and enter a language code. (→P.221)
Subtitle language A Select to change the initial audio language. (→P.173) 1 Select “Subtitle Language”. B Select to change the initial subtitle 2 Select the desired language to be language. (→P.173) read. C Select to change the initial lan- If the desired language to be read guage of the disc menu. (→P.173) cannot be found on this screen, D Select to set the angle mark on/off. select “Other” and enter a language → E Select to set the parental lock. code. ( P.221) (→P.173) Menu language F BD history data such as bookmarks and resume point can be deleted. 1 Select “Menu Language”. G Select to set the restriction age. 2 Select the desired language to be (→P.174) read. H Select to set a quick playback. If the desired language to be read (BD-Video) cannot be found on this screen, After inserting a BD disc you can select “Other” and enter a language skip over to the first playback point code. (→P.221) and can immediately playback the main story. Parental lock I Select to set a dynamic range. (→P.174) 1 Select “Parental Lock”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 174 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code. The player starts playing video for 3 Select a parental level (1-8). that title or chapter number.
Dynamic range Changing the audio language
The difference between the lowest and The audio language can be changed highest sound volumes can be for discs with multiple audio languages. adjusted. 1 Select “Audio”. 1 Select “Dynamic Range”. 2 Each time “Audio” is selected, 2 Select the desired item. another language available on the disc is selected. “MAX”: Maximum dynamic range “MID”: Standard dynamic range The languages available are “MIN”: Minimum dynamic range restricted to those available on the “AUTO”: Automatic adjust (Dolby TrueHD DVD disc. only) Changing the subtitle language ●“AUTO” is available for BD-Video only. ●“MIN” is not available for BD-Video. The subtitle language can be changed for discs with multiple subtitle lan- BD parental lock guages. 1 Select “Subtitle”. 1 Select “BD Parental Lock”. 2 Each time “Subtitle” is selected, 2 Enter the 4-digit personal code. another language available on the 3 Enter the age on the “Enter Age disc is selected. Restriction (0-255)” screen. The languages available are restricted to those available on the Searching for a title or chapter disc. ■ DVD video When “Hide” is selected, the subti- 1 Select “Search”. tles can be hidden. 2 Enter the title number or chapter number, and select “OK”. Changing the angle The player starts playing video for The angle can be selected for discs that title or chapter number. that are multi-angle compatible when ■ the angle mark appears on the screen. AVCHD™ video 1 Select “Title” or “Chapter”. 1 Select “Angle”. 2 Enter the title number or chapter 2 Each time “Angle” is selected, the number, and select “OK”. angle is changed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 175 The angles available are restricted slow forward. to those available on the disc. I Select to search for a title. (→P.174) J Select to search for a chapter. AVCHD™ video options (→P.174) 1 Touch “Options” on the directional K Select to return to a predetermined pad screen. scene. 2 Check that the following screen is L Select to change the audio lan- displayed. guage. (→P.174) M Select to change the subtitle lan- 4 guage. (→P.174) Audio/visual system
A Select to display the initial setup screen. (→P.172) B Select to turn off the option screen. C Select to display the next or previ- ous page. D Select to display the top menu screen. E Select and hold to fast rewind. F Select to stop. G Select to play/pause. H During playback: Select and hold to fast forward. During a pause: Select and hold to
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 176 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
Blu-ray Disc™ (BD-Video E Select to stop. and BDAV) F Touch to display the top menu screen.* This system can play Blu-ray Disc™ G Touch to display the pop-up menu (BD) videos with digital sound. screen.* In addition to commercial BD titles, *: BD-Video only BDAV videos can be played on this system, therefore digital TV Directional pad screen recorded by home digital video recorders can also be played on this system. The disc operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.162 Inserting a disc: →P.164 A Touch to display the option screen. → Overview ( P.177) B Color buttons. The color button is ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel used for various uses according to Operation screen directions of contents.* *: BD-Video only
Key pad screen
A Touch and hold to fast rewind. B Touch to play/pause. C During playback: Touch and hold to A Key pad buttons.* fast forward. The key pad screen is used when During a pause: Touch and hold to inputting numbers according to slow forward. directions of contents.* D Touch to select a chapter. *: BD-Video only Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind. ●Some BD-Video discs have a local stor-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 177 age feature which allows the disc’s addi- 2 Check that the following screen is tional information, such as resume displayed. information, to be stored. This additional information can be utilized when BD-Video is being played. Refer to the manual that came with the BD-Video disc to see whether it has a local storage fea- ture. If it does, the local storage feature can be enabled by inserting an SD card into this system. ●If an SD card with existing data, is inserted, BD-Video disc information will not be stored on the SD card in order to 4 protect the data on the SD card. To enable the local storage feature, use an SD card that does not have any data on it. Audio/visual system
BD-Video options
1 Touch “Options” on the directional pad screen.
A Select to display the initial setup screen. (→P.172) B Select to turn off the option screen. C Select to display the next or previ- ous page. D Select to display the top menu screen. E Select to display the pop-up menu. (→P.178) F Select and hold to fast rewind. G Select to stop. H Select to play/pause.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 178 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
I During playback: Select and hold to 2 Input the title number or chapter fast forward. number, and select “OK”. During a pause: Select and hold to The player starts playing video for slow forward. that title or chapter number. J Select to search for a title. (→P.178) K Select to search for a chapter. Changing the audio language → ( P.178) The audio language can be changed L Select to return to a predetermined for discs with multiple audio languages. scene. 1 Select “Audio”. M Select to change the audio lan- 2 Each time “Audio” is selected, guage. (→P.178) another language available on the N Select to change the subtitle lan- disc is selected. guage. (→P.178) O Select to change the angle. Changing the subtitle language (→P.178) The subtitle language can be changed P Select to display the color key but- for discs with multiple subtitle lan- tons. (→P.179) guages. Q Select to display the 10 key pad. 1 Select “Subtitle”. → ( P.179) 2 Each time “Subtitle” is selected, R Select to display the secondary another language available on the video (Picture-in-picture). disc is selected → ( P.179) “Hide”: Subtitle can be hidden. S Select to change the secondary “Style”: Subtitle style can be changed. audio. (→P.179) Changing the angle Displaying the pop-up menu The angle can be changed for discs Some BD-Video discs have a pop-up that are multi-angle compatible when navigation menu that can be called up the angle mark appears on the screen. and be operated on the screen without 1 Select “Angle”. interrupting playback. 2 Each time “Angle” is selected, the 1 Select “Pop-up Menu”. angle is changed. 2 Select the menu item. The angles available are restricted to those available on the BD disc. Searching for a title or chapter 1 Select “Title” or “Chapter”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 179
Displaying the color key buttons Changing the secondary audio
The color button is used for various The secondary audio that for the sec- uses according to directions of con- ondary video can be changed. tents. 1 Select “PinP Audio”. 1 Select “Color Keys”. 2 Each time “PinP Audio” is selected, 2 Select the color button. another secondary audio stored on Color buttons on the directional the disc is selected. pad screen can also be used to input “OFF”: Select to turn the secondary audio 4 the desired color. off
BDAV options Audio/visual system Displaying the 10 key pad 1 Touch “Options” on the directional The 10 key pad is used when inputting pad screen. numbers according to directions of contents. 2 Check that the following screen is 1 Select “Key Pad”. displayed. 2 Select the number button. Key pad buttons on the key pad screen can also be used to input the desired number.
Displaying the secondary video (picture-in-picture) Picture-in-picture is a secondary video that plays embedded in the primary video. The secondary video can be played from a disc compatible with the picture-in-picture function. 1 Select “PinP”. 2 The secondary video is displayed A on the screen. Each time “PinP” is Select to display the initial setup → selected, another secondary video screen. ( P.172) available on the disc is selected. B Select to turn off the option screen. “Hide”: Secondary video can be hidden. C Select to display the next or previ- ous page. D Select and hold to fast rewind.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 180 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
E Select to stop. discs with multiple audio channels. F Select to play/pause. 1 Select “Main/Sub”. G During playback: Select and hold to 2 Each time “Main/Sub” is selected, fast forward. the mode changes in the following During a pause: Select and hold to order: slow forward. “Main”: Main audio channel H Select to search for a title. (→P.178) “Sub”: Sub audio channel “Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio I Select to search for a chapter. channels (→P.178) J Select to change the playback mode. (→P.180) K Select to change the audio lan- guage. (→P.178) L Select to change the angle. (→P.178) M Select to change the audio channel. (→P.180)
●Depending on the disc, some buttons may not be displayed on the screen.
Changing the playback mode
The playback mode can be changed to program mode or playlist mode. Play- list mode cannot be selected if a play- list is not stored on the disc. 1 Select “Playback Mode”. 2 Each time “Playback Mode” is selected, the mode changes. “Program”: Playback the disc in order of program number “Playlist”: Playback the disc in order of playlist number
Changing the audio channel
The audio channel can be changed for
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 181
USB memory USB video
USB audio/video can be played on this system. The USB memory operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.162 Connecting a USB memory: A Select to display the audio screen. 4 →P.108 ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel Audio/visual system Operation screen (USB audio) Overview
■ Rear display
USB audio
A Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind. B Touch to play/pause. C Touch to select a file/track. A Select to set repeat playback. D Touch to select a folder/album. B Select to set random playback. E Touch to change the video mode. C Select to display the video screen. Operation screen (USB video) ●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When random playback is off • file/track repeat → folder/album repeat → off When random playback is on • file/track repeat → off ●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: → • random (1 folder/album random) A folder/album random (all folder/album Touch and hold to fast rewind. random) → off B Touch to play/pause.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 182 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
C During playback: Touch and hold to slow forward. fast forward. During a pause: Touch and hold to slow forward. D Touch to select a file. E Touch to change the music mode.
Directional pad screen (USB video)
A Touch to display the option screen. (→P.182)
USB video options
1 Touch “Options” on the directional pad screen. 2 Check that the following screen is displayed.
A Select to turn off the option screen. B Select and hold to fast rewind. C Select to play/pause. D During playback: Select and hold to fast forward. During a pause: Select and hold to
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 183
iPod ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel Operation screen iPod audio can be played on this system. The iPod operation screen can be reached by the following methods: →P.162 Connecting an iPod: →P.108 4 A Touch and hold to fast for-
Overview Audio/visual system ward/rewind. ■ Rear display B Touch to play/pause. C Touch to select a track.
A Select to set repeat playback. B Select to set random playback.
●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When shuffle is off (iPhone 5 or later) • track repeat → album repeat → off When shuffle is off (iPhone 4s or earlier) • track repeat → off When shuffle is on • track repeat → off ●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: •shuffle (1 album shuffle) → album shuffle (all album shuffle) → off ●Some functions may not be available depending on the type of model.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 184 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
Bluetooth® audio ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel Operation screen The Bluetooth® audio operation screen can be reached by the fol- lowing method: →P.162 Connecting a Bluetooth® audio device: →P.131
Overview A Touch and hold to fast for- ward/rewind. ■ Rear display B Touch to play/pause. C Touch to select a track. D Touch to select an album.
A Select to set repeat playback. B Select to set random playback.
●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When random playback is off • track repeat → album repeat → off When random playback is on • track repeat → off ●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: • random (1 album random) → album ran- dom (all album random) → off ●Depending on the type of portable player connected, some functions may not be available.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 185
SD card D Select to play still pictures. (→P.186) This system can play still pictures, E Select to play SD video. (→P.187) music and movies (SD video, F Select to play AVCHD™ Video. AVCHD™ video, etc.) that are (→P.187) stored on an SD card. G Select to play a movie. (→P.187) The SD operation screen can be ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel reached by the following method: →P.162 1 Display the advanced audio/visual operation screen. (→P.161) 4 Inserting an SD card: →P.164
2 Touch “SD Menu”. Audio/visual system
Selecting the SD mode
■ Rear display 1 Select “SD Menu”.
3 Touch the desired mode.
2 Select the desired mode.
For detail about the mode: →P.185
Music
Music files stored on an SD card can A Select to format the SD card. be played. If the SD card is formatted, all data on the card will be erased. B Select to delete stored BD-Video data from the SD card. C Select to play music. (→P.185)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 186 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
■ Rear display E Touch to display the SD menu screen. (→P.185)
Picture
Image files stored on an SD card can be displayed individually or in a slide- show. ■ Rear display A Select to set repeat playback. B Select to set random playback. C Select to display the SD menu screen. (→P.185)
●Each time is selected, the mode changes as follows: When random playback is off •file repeat → folder repeat → off A Select to display the desired still When random playback is on •file repeat → off picture. ●Each time is selected, the B Select to scroll pages. mode changes as follows: ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel • random (1 folder random) → folder ran- dom (all folder random) → off Directional pad screen ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel
Operation screen
A When a full screen picture is dis- played, touch to change the dis- played picture. A Touch and hold to fast for- B When the picture thumbnail list is ward/rewind. displayed: Touch to display the B Touch to play/pause. selected picture in full screen. C Touch to select a file. When a full screen picture is dis- D Touch to select a folder. played: Touch to display the picture
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 187 thumbnail list. 2 Select the items to be set. C When a full screen picture is dis- played, touch to display the option screen. (→P.187)
Picture options
1 Touch “Options” on the directional pad screen. 2 Check that the following screen is A Select to set slideshow interval 4 displayed. time. “5s” → “10s” → “15s” → “30s” → Audio/visual system “60s” B Select to set slideshow effect. “Fade” → “Slide” → “Wipe1” → “Wipe2” → “Dissolve” → “Zoom” → “Off” C Select to set repeat of the slide- show on/off. A Select to turn off the option screen. D Select to initialize all menus. B Select to display the setup screen. 3 Select “OK”. (→P.187) C Select to display the picture list Video/AVCHD /Movie screen. ™ D Select to zoom on the still picture. Video files stored on an SD card can be played. E Select to rotate the still picture. ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel F Select to display the current still picture information. Operation screen G Select to start a slideshow.
Picture settings screen
1 Select “Setup”.
A Touch and hold to fast rewind. B Touch to play/pause.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 188 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
C During playback: Touch and hold to 2 Check that the following screen is fast forward. displayed. During a pause: Touch and hold to slow forward. D Touch to select a file/chapter. E Select to stop. F Touch to select a folder.* G Touch to display the SD menu screen. (→P.185) *:SD movie only
Directional pad screen
A Select to turn off the option screen. B Select to display the next or previ- ous page.* A Touch to display the option screen. C Select to display the file informa- (→P.188) tion. D Select and hold to fast rewind. Video/AVCHD™/Movie options E Select to stop. 1 Touch “Options” on the directional F pad screen. Select to play/pause. G During playback: Select and hold to fast forward. During a pause: Select and hold to slow forward. H Select to search for a title.* (→P.189) I Select to search for a chapter.* (→P.189) J Select to change the playback mode.* (→P.189) K Select to change the audio chan-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 189
nel.* (→P.189) “Main/Sub”: Both the main and sub audio channels *: SD Video only
●Depending on the data stored on the SD card, some buttons may not be displayed on the screen.
Searching for a title or chapter
1 Select “Title Search” or “Chapter Search”. 4
2 Enter the title or chapter number Audio/visual system and select “OK”. The player starts playing video for that title or chapter number.
Changing the playback mode
The playback mode can be changed to program mode or playlist mode. Play- list mode cannot be selected if a play- list is not stored on the SD card. 1 Select “Playback Mode”. 2 Each time “Playback Mode” is selected, the mode changes. “Program”: Playback the disc in order of program number “Playlist”: Playback the disc in order of playlist number
Changing the audio channel
The audio channel can be changed for videos with multiple audio channels. 1 Select “Multiplexed Audio”. 2 Each time “Audio” is selected, the mode changes in the following order: “Main”: Main audio channel “Sub”: Sub audio channel
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 190 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
External devices Rear-DLNA
The rear seat entertainment system To use the rear-DLNA function, a plays videos and sound when device with a DLNA server applica- audio/visual equipment is con- tion installed must be connected. nected to the A/V input port. Devices (smartphone, etc.) with a The external devices operation DLNA server application can screen can be reached by the fol- stream video/music/photos to the lowing methods: rear seat entertainment system via →P.162 Wi-Fi®.* Connecting a external device The rear-DLNA operation screen The front player: →P.108 can be reached by the following methods: → The rear player: P.165 →P.162 *: Wi-Fi is a registered mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
●If a connected device is taken out of the Wi-Fi® connection area, the connection will be severed. ●If the vehicle is driven out of the cellular communication coverage area, connect- ing to the internet via the Wi-Fi® Hotspot will not be possible. ●If a Bluetooth® device is used while a device is connected using the Wi-Fi® Hotspot function, the communication speed may decrease. ●Depending on the environment in which the access point is used, the communica- tion speed may be low or communication may not be possible. ●The Wi-Fi® networks serve best-effort traffic. ●When the rear-DLNA function is used, some functions of the connected device, such as its internet connection, may not be available. For details, refer to the owner’s manual for the device.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 191
* WARNING 2 Check that “Wi-Fi ” is on. ●Use Wi-Fi® devices only when safe and legal to do so. ●Your audio unit is fitted with Wi-Fi® antennas. People with implantable car- diac pacemakers, cardiac resynchro- nization therapy-pacemakers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reasonable distance between themselves and the Wi-Fi® antennas. 3 Connect a device to the rear seat The radio waves may affect the opera- 4 tion of such devices. entertainment system via Wi-Fi®. Audio/visual system ●Before using Wi-Fi® devices, users of 4 Operate the device to stream any electrical medical device other video/music/photos. than implantable cardiac pacemakers, cardiac resynchronization ther- *: Wi-Fi is a registered mark of the Wi-Fi apy-pacemakers or implantable car- Alliance®. dioverter defibrillators should consult the manufacturer of the device for information about its operation under ●DLNA streaming will stop in the follow- the influence of radio waves. ing situations: Radio waves could have unexpected • The DLNA connection is turned off on the device. effects on the operation of such medi- ® cal devices. •The Wi-Fi function is turned off. • The rear seat entertainment system ●Do not operate the smartphone’s con- source is changed to different source. trols or connect the smartphone to the (→P.162) system while driving. Changing the access point name NOTICE and password ●If a device is connected via ® After a device has been connected to Bluetooth to the front audio system ® for the hands-free system or another the vehicle Wi-Fi access point once, function, the rear-DLNA function will the access point information will ® not be available, as any Wi-Fi con- remain on the device, enabling it auto- nections to the rear seat entertainment system will be severed. matically connect the next time the device is brought within access point ●Do not leave your smartphone in the vehicle. In particular, high tempera- range, unless the access point name or tures inside the vehicle may damage password is changed. the smartphone. To change the access point name and password, select “Refresh”. If changed Connecting to the system while a device is connected to the 1 Display the rear-DLNA operation access point, the connection will be screen. (→P.162) canceled.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 192 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
1 Select “Refresh”. Rear-DLNA operation
■ Rear display
2 Select “Yes”.
A The Wi-Fi® function is turned on/off. B Select to display Wi-Fi® system information ■ Rear Multi Operation Panel
Operation screen (Music/video ●The Wi-Fi® access point name and pass- only) word can only be changed after “Refresh” is selected. (The settings will be retained when the engine switch
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation 193
Directional pad screen (Video only) Rear-Miracast™*
*: Miracast is a trademark of Wi-Fi Alliance®. Miracast™ compatible devices (smartphone, etc.)*1 can stream video and audio to the rear seat entertainment system via Wi-Fi®.*2 This function is not available if the A Touch to display the option screen. 4 → smartphone is not certified by Wi-Fi ( P.193) ®
Alliance as Miracast™ device. Audio/visual system Video options The rear-Miracast™ operation screen can be reached by the fol- 1 Touch “Options” on the directional lowing methods: pad screen. →P.162 *1: With Android OS version 4.4 or later *2: Wi-Fi is a registered mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance®.
WARNING ●Do not operate the smartphone’s con- trols or connect the smartphone to the system while driving. A Select to turn off the option screen. B Select and hold to fast rewind. NOTICE C Select to play/pause. ●If a device is connected via Bluetooth® to the front audio system D During playback: Select and hold to for the hands-free system or another fast forward. function, the Miracast™ function will ® During a pause: Select and hold to not be available, as any Wi-Fi con- nections to the rear seat entertainment slow forward. system will be severed. ●Do not leave your smartphone in the vehicle. In particular, high tempera- tures inside the vehicle may damage the smartphone.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 194 4-8. Rear seat entertainment system operation
Connecting to the system
1 Display the rear-Miracast™ opera- tion screen. (→P.162) 2 Check that the following screen is displayed.
3 Activate Miracast™ on the device and set it to output to the rear seat entertainment system.
●Miracast™ streaming will stop in the fol- lowing situations: • The Miracast™ function of the connected device is turned off. • Select “Disconnect” on the rear-Miracast™ operation screen. • The rear seat entertainment system source is changed to a different source. (→P.162)
Rear-Miracast™ operation
■ Rear display
A Select to disconnect the Miracast™ device.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-9. Rear seat entertainment system settings 195
4-9.Rear seat entertainment system settings Rear seat entertainment sys- 3 Select the desired item to be set. tem settings
Displaying the settings screen
1 Display the advanced audio/visual operation screen. (→P.161) 2 Touch “Settings”.
3 Select the desired tab to be set. A Select to strengthen the red or 4 green color. B Select to weaken or strengthen the Audio/visual system contrast. C Select to weaken or strengthen the tone. D Select to darken or brighten the screen. A Select to adjust the screen. (→P.195) Changing the screen size B Select to change the screen size. The screen size can be changed for (→P.195) each input mode individually. C Select to display the settings 1 Display the settings screen. → screen. ( P.196) (→P.195) D Select to tilt the rear display. 2 Select the “Screen Size” tab. (→P.196) 3 Select the desired screen size. ●Depending on the audio source, some functions may not be available.
Adjusting the screen
The screen image quality, such as the brightness and contrast levels, can be adjusted. Adjustable items depend on the selected input source. A Select to display the screen at the 1 Display the settings screen. original ratio. (→P.195) B Select to widen the 4:3 aspect 2 Select the “Display” tab. screen horizontally to fill the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 196 4-9. Rear seat entertainment system settings screen. 2 Select the “Tilt” tab. C Select to enlarge the image by the 3 Select the desired item to be set. same ratio horizontally and verti- cally.
●Depending on the source, some func- tions may not be available.
Settings screen
1 Display the settings screen. (→P.195) A Select to adjust the rear display angle. The rear display angle is 2 Select the “Settings” tab. memorized and will be recalled 3 Select the desired item to be set. when the engine switch
WARNING A Select to turn the rear display off. ●When adjusting the angle of the rear B Select to turn on/off the “LCD AI”. display, be careful not to catch a hand, etc. on the rear display as doing so The “LCD AI” automatically deter- may cause an injury or the rear display mines the tone of the video image to malfunction. and sets the contrast to an optimum level, displaying a sharp image. NOTICE C Select to turn the “Super Resolu- ●Do not attempt to move the rear dis- tion” function on/off. play by hand, as doing so may damage When turned on, the “Super Reso- the rear display. lution” function enhances image quality to deliver a feeling of a Automatic angle adjustment of the higher resolution image. rear displays When a front seat is adjusted, the angle Tilting the rear display of the corresponding rear display will 1 Display the settings screen. be adjusted automatically. If the angle (→P.195) of the rear display has been adjusted manually, the automatic adjustment will
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-9. Rear seat entertainment system settings 197 be performed in accordance with the manually adjusted angle.
4 Audio/visual system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 198 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
4-10.Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system Operating information H Reverse I Change audio language Remote control (available as a J Switch between operation of left dealer option*) and right display K Change speaker output *: Available in the contiguous United States, Hawaii, Guam, and Puerto Rico L Move cursor M Change source Using the remote controller N Change input to HDMI/front disc player/rear disc player O Enter P Increase/Decrease volume Q Change screen size (aspect ratio) R Stop S Fast forward T Display menu screen U Display option screen
●For new vehicle owners, remove the insu- lating sheet before using the remote con- troller. ●An insulating sheet is set to prevent the batteries from being depleted.
Battery Replacement A Turn rear seat entertainment sys- tem on/off 1 Remove the cover. B Swap screens of left and right dis- 2 Remove the depleted batteries and play install new batteries. C Display/Hide screen settings dis- ●If the remote controller batteries are dis- play charged. The following symptoms may D Jump to next/previous chap- occur. • The remote controller will not function ter/track/file properly. E Jump to next/previous folder • The operational range is reduced. ●Use two aa batteries. F Play/Pause ●Batteries can be purchased at Lexus G Turn screen off dealer, electric appliance shop, or cam- era stores.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 199
●Replace only with the same or equivalent type recommended by Lexus dealer. Rear display ●Dispose of used batteries according to the local laws. NOTICE ●Cleaning the rear display: Wipe the WARNING rear display with a dry soft cloth. If the screen is wiped with a rough cloth, the ●To prevent accidents and electric surface of the screen may be shock: scratched. Do not disassemble or modify the remote controller. Caution screen ●When the remote controller is not 4 used: Stow the remote controller. Injuries A caution screen appears for a few may result in the event of an accident seconds when the rear seat entertain- Audio/visual system or sudden braking. ment system turns on. ●Removed battery and other parts: These parts are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. When appears on the screen Keep away from children. Failure to do so could result in death or serious indicates that the selected icon injury. cannot be used at this time.
NOTICE Volume ●To prevent damage to the remote con- troller: Adjust the volume when you con- • Keep the remote controller away from nect the headphone to the jack. direct sunlight, heat and high humidity. Loud sounds may have a significant • Do not drop or strike the remote con- impact on the human body. troller against hard objects. Conversational speech on some • Do not sit on or place heavy objects on the remote controller. BDs/DVDs is recorded at a low vol- ume to emphasize the impact of ● For normal operation after replacing sound effects. If you adjust the vol- the battery: Observe the following precautions to ume assuming that the conversa- prevent accidents. tions represent the maximum • Always work with dry hands. Moisture volume level that the BD/DVD will may cause the battery to rust. play, you may be startled by louder • Do not touch or move any other com- sound effects or when you change ponents inside the remote controller. to a different audio source. Be sure • Do not bend either of the battery ter- to adjust the volume with this in minals. mind.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 200 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
Copyrights and trademarks
Blu-ray Disc™, Blu-ray™, BD-Live™, BDXL™, and the logos are trademarks of the Blu-ray Disc Association.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. Dolby and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“AVCHD”, “AVCHD Progressive” and the “AVCHD Progressive” logo are trademarks of Panasonic Cor- poration and Sony Corporation.
For DTS patents, see http://pat- ents.dts.com. Manufactured under license from DTS Licensing Limited. DTS, DTS-HD, the Symbol, & DTS and the Symbol together are regis- tered trademarks, and DTS-HD “DVD Logo” is a trademark of DVD Master Audio | Essential is a trade- Format/Logo Licensing Corpora- mark of DTS, Inc. © DTS, Inc. All tion. Rights Reserved.
SDXC Logo is a trademark of This product is licensed under the SD-3C, LLC. MPEG-4 patent portfolio license, AVC patent portfolio license and VC-1 patent portfolio license for the personal use of a consumer or other uses in which it does not receive
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 201 remuneration to Verance Corporation and is pro- (i) encode video in compliance with tected by U.S. Patent 7,369,677 and the MPEG-4 Visual Standard, AVC other U.S. and worldwide patents Standard and VC-1 Standard issued and pending as well as copy- (“MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video”) right and trade secret protection for and/or certain aspects of such technology. (ii) decode MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Cinavia is a trademark of Verance Video that was encoded by a con- Corporation. Copyright sumer engaged in a personal activ- 2004-2014 Verance Corporation. ity and/or was obtained from a video All rights reserved by Verance. 4 provider licensed to provide Reverse engineering or disassembly
MPEG-4/AVC/VC-1 Video. is prohibited. Audio/visual system No license is granted or shall be WMA (Windows Media Audio), implied for any other use. Microsoft, Windows, and Windows Additional information may be Media are the registered trade- obtained from MPEG LA, L.L.C. marks of Microsoft Corporation in See http://www.mpegla.com. the U.S. and other countries. Cinavia Notice This product is protected by certain This product uses Cinavia technol- intellectual property rights of Micro- ogy to limit the use of unauthorized soft Corporation and third parties. copies of some commercially-pro- Use or distribution of such technol- duced film and videos and their ogy outside of this product is pro- soundtracks. When a prohibited use hibited without a license from of an unauthorized copy is detected, Microsoft or an authorized Micro- a message will be displayed and soft subsidiary and third parties. playback or copying will be inter- This item incorporates copy protec- rupted. tion technology that is protected by More information about Cinavia U.S. patents and other intellectual technology is provided at the Cina- property rights of Rovi Corporation. via Online Consumer Information Reverse engineering and disassem- Center at http://www.cinavia.com. bly are prohibited. To request additional information HDMI about Cinavia by mail, send a post- card with your mailing address to: Cinavia ConsumerInformation Center, P.O. Box 86851, San Diego, CA, 92138, USA. This product incorporates propri- etary technology under license from
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 202 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 203
4 Audio/visual system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 204 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system Java is a registered trademark of Oracle and/or its affiliates.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 205
4 Audio/visual system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 206 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 207 About Open Source Software
4 Audio/visual system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 208 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 209
4 Audio/visual system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 210 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 211
4 Audio/visual system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 212 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 213
4 Audio/visual system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 214 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
CD/DVD/Blu-ray disc™ player Discs that can be used and discs Discs with the marks shown below can ■ Certification be used. CAUTION: Playback may not be possible depend- THIS PRODUCT IS A CLASS ing on recording format or disc fea- LASER PRODUCT. USE OF tures, or due to scratches, dirt or CONTROLS OR ADJUSTMENTS deterioration. OR PERFORMANCE OF PROCE- DURES OTHER THAN THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIATION EXPOSURE. DO NOT OPEN COV- ERS AND DO NOT REPAIR BY YOURSELF. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED PERSONNEL.
WARNING ●BD/DVD video precaution: Conver- sational speech on some BDs/DVDs is recorded at a low volume to empha- size the impact of sound effects. If you The following discs cannot be used adjust the volume assuming that the conversations represent the maximum on this system: volume level that the BD/DVD will • Ultra HD Blu-ray™ play, you may be startled by louder sound effects or startled when you •BDXL™ disc change to a different audio source. Loud sounds may have a significant • BD-RE with the cartridge impact on the human body or pose a •AVCREC driving hazard. Keep this in mind when you adjust the volume. • HD DVD •DVD-Audio NOTICE •SACD ●Never try to disassemble or oil any Blu-ray 3D™ discs can only be part of the BD/DVD/CD player. Do played in 2D. not insert anything other than a disc into the slot. Discs and adapters that cannot be used: Do not use the following types of discs. Also, do not use 3 in. (8 cm) disc adapters, Dual Discs or printable discs.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 215
Doing so may damage the player Discs that have tape, stickers or and/or disc insert/eject function. CD-R labels attached to them, or
Discs that have a diameter that is not that have had the label peeled off 4.7 in. (12 cm)
4 Audio/visual system
NOTICE Low-quality or deformed discs ●Player precautions: Failure to follow the precautions below may result in damage to the discs or the player itself. • Do not insert anything other than discs into the disc slot. • Do not apply oil to the player. • Store discs away from direct sunlight. • Never try to disassemble any part of the player.
Discs with a transparent or translu- cent recording area About MP3/WMA/AAC files and compatibility MP3 (MPEG Audio LAYER3), WMA (Windows Media Audio) and AAC (Advanced Audio Coding) is a stan- dard audio compression format. There is a limit to the MP3, WMA and AAC file standards and to the media/formats recorded by them that can be used.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 216 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
MP3 file compatibility AAC file compatibility
Compatible MP3 (MPEG1 LAYER3, MPEG2/AAC-LC, Compatible standards MPEG2 LSF LAYER3) MPEG4/AAC-LC standards (ADIF is not supported) MPEG1 LAYER3: 32, Compatible 44.1, 48 (kHz) ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 16, sampling fre- MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 16, 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 quencies Compatible (kHz) 22.05, 24 (kHz) sampling fre- MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 16, MPEG1 LAYER3: quencies 22.05, 24, 32, 44.1, 48 32-320 (kbps) Compatible (kHz) bit rates MPEG2 LSF LAYER3: 8-160 (kbps) (compatible ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): 8-384 (kbps) with VBR) Compatible MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): Compatible bit rates stereo, joint stereo, dual 8-384 (kbps) channel channel and mono (compatible with VBR) modes ADTS (MPEG2 AAC): ID3 Ver. 1.0, 1.1, 2.2, 2.3 1/0, 2/0, 3/0, 2/1, 2/2, and Ver. 2.4 ID3 tags. (The Compatible 3/1, 3/2.1 ID3 tags number of characters is channel based on ID3 Ver. 1.0 and modes MP4 (MPEG4 AAC): 1/0, 1.1.) 2/0, 3/0, 2/1, 2/2, 3/1, 3/2.1 WMA file compatibility ADTS(MPEG2 AAC) ID3 v1, v2 Compatible AAC tags MP4(MPEG4 AAC) WMA Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2) standards Obtained from MP4 con- tainer metadata box Compatible 8, 11.025, 16, 22.05, 32, sampling fre- 44.1, 48 (kHz) quencies Compatible media and disc formats Ver. 7, 8, 9 (9.1/9.2): CBR Compatible CD-ROM/R/RW 5-320 (kbps) (only com- Compatible media patible with 2-channel DVD-ROM/R/RW bit rates playback) CD-ROM Mode 1, (compatible with VBR) Disc formats CD-ROM XA Mode 2 Form 1, DVD-ROM ISO9660 Level 1, 2, 3, 4 (Romeo, Joliet, Rock- File formats Ridge), UDF (1.02, 1.50, 2.00, 2.01)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 217
ISO9660 Level 1, 2, 3 : 8 WMA or AAC files is inserted, all levels files on the disc are first checked. ISO9660 Level 4 : Unlim- Once the file check is finished, the ited Maximum first MP3, WMA or AAC file is UDF : 100 levels directory played. To make the file check finish Maximum full path size: hierarchy more quickly, we recommend you 256 bytes (including inter- do not write in any files other than nal management path (during disc playback: MP3, WMA or AAC files or create “/mnt/odd/” (9 bytes))) any unnecessary folders. If the discs contain a mixture of music data and 4 The number of the maxi- MP3, WMA or AAC format data, Maximum mum indication letters by length of design specifications of the only music data can be played. Audio/visual system folder indication machine side To play MP3 files with steady sound names/file (support proportional font, quality, we recommend a fixed bit names and there are distinction of rate of 128 kbps and a sampling fre- the half size and full size) quency of 44.1 kHz. Maximum Playback may not be possible in number of 255 (including the root) some instances, depending on the folders characteristics of the disc. Maximum number of 512 There is a wide variety of freeware files per disc and other encoding software for MP3, WMA or AAC files on the market, and depending on the status File names of the encoding and the file format, The only files that can be recognized as poor sound quality or noise at the MP3/WMA/AAC and played are start of playback may result. In some those with the extension .mp3, .wma or cases, playback may not be possible .m4a. at all. When files other than MP3, WMA Multi-sessions or AAC files are recorded on a disc, it may take more time to recognize As the audio system is compatible with the disc and in some cases, play- multi-sessions, it is possible to play back may not be possible at all. discs that contain MP3, WMA and AAC files. Extensions
MP3, WMA and AAC playback If the file extensions .mp3, .wma and .m4a are used for files other than MP3, When a disc containing MP3, WMA and AAC files, they will be mis-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 218 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system takenly recognized and played as are BD-ROMs, BD-Rs, BD-REs, MP3, WMA and AAC files. This may DVD-ROMs, DVD-Rs and DVD-RWs. result in large amounts of interference and damage to the speakers. Compatible disc formats
Dynamic range Disc formats that can be used for play- back are BD-Video formats, BDAV “Dynamic Range” can be set only when formats, AVCHD™ formats, and DVD Dolby Digital or Dolby TrueHD is video formats. selected. When Dolby TrueHD is selected, the dynamic range is the ●When storing content on BD-R, BD-RE, DVD-R or DVD-RW discs, they must be same as “MAX” even when set to finalized using a recorder. Discs that are “MIN”. (→P.174) not finalized cannot be played by this sys- tem. BD-Video secondary audio ●Discs that are recorded with multi session cannot be played by this system. If BD-Video secondary audio is set to ●BD-Live™ is not supported. on, secondary audio is output during sections that have secondary audio The color TV formats recorded. During these sections, HD This player conforms to NTSC/PAL sound, such as 7.1 ch audio, will not be color TV formats. output.
However, if you are playing sections Region codes that meet all of the following condi- tions, HD sound can be output: Some BD/DVD video discs have a There is no interactive audio region code indicating the region in which you can use the BD/DVD video There is no secondary audio disc. If the BD-Video disc is not labeled There are no BD-J titles “A” or “ABC” or if the DVD video disc is If BD-Video secondary audio is set to not labeled “1” or “ALL”, you cannot use off, HD sound can be output. However, it on this player. for sections that have secondary audio Depending on the disc production recorded, secondary audio will not be company, some Blu-ray Disc™ may be output. designed to not be able to be played in some countries and regions. BD/DVD video discs If you attempt to play BD/DVD video discs with incompatible region codes Compatible media on this player, an error message appears on the screen. Even if the Media that can be used for playback BD/DVD video disc does not have a
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 219
region code, in some cases it cannot be BD/DVD video disc information used.
Parental controls Marks shown on BD/DVD video discs This feature limits what can be viewed in conformity with the level of restric- Indicates compatibility with tions of the country. The level of restric- PAL/NTSC format color TVs tions varies depending on the BD/DVD video disc. Some BD/DVD video discs cannot be played at all, or 4 Indicates the number of audio violent scenes are skipped or replaced
tracks. Audio/visual system with other scenes. Disc formats that can be used for play- Indicates the number of lan- back are BD-Video formats, BDAV guage subtitles. formats, AVCHD™ formats, and DVD video formats. Indicates the number of DVD video angles. Level 1: DVD video discs for chil- dren can be played. Indicates the screen to be Level 2 - 7: DVD video discs for chil- selected. dren and G-rated movie can be Wide screen: 16:9 played. Standard: 4:3 Level 8: All types of the DVD video discs can be played.
BD-Video Parental controls of BD-Videos can be Indicates the disc’s region set up by inputting an age. If the target code age of BD-Video exceeds the age • BD-Video restriction that was set up, then play- “ABC”: all regions Alphabet: region code back will not be possible. • DVD video “ALL”: all regions Multi-angle feature Number: region code You can enjoy the same scene from dif- ferent angles.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 220 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
Multi-language option BDAV (Blu-ray Disc™ audio/visual)
You can select the subtitle and audio BDAV is one of the audio/visual languages. recording formats for Blu-ray Disc™, has been made primarily for the pur- Region codes pose of broadcasting the recording. It is used when recording to BD-R and The region codes are provided on BD-RE by Blu-ray Disc™ recorder. BD/DVD players and BD/DVD discs. If the BD/DVD disc does not have the same region code as the BD/DVD BD-J player, you cannot play the disc on the Some BD-Video discs contain Java player. applications, and these applications are called BD-J. You can enjoy various Title and chapter interactive features in addition to play- ing normal video. Video and audio stored on BD/DVD video discs are divided into parts by title and chapter. Pop-up menu Title: The largest portion of the video Some BD-Video discs have a pop-up and audio stored on BD/DVD video navigation menu that can be called up discs. Usually, one movie, one album, and be operated on the screen without or one audio program is assigned as a interrupting playback. title. Chapter: A title comprises of one or Picture-in-picture more chapters. This is a function of BD-Video that plays the primary video and secondary AVCHD™ video simultaneously. For instance, the function is capable of playing the origi- AVCHD™ is a new format (standard) for high definition video cameras that nal movie as the primary video while can record and play high-resolution playing video commentary from the HD images. film director on a small screen as a sec- ondary video. Title: The largest portion of the video and audio stored on BD/DVD video DUBA (disc unbound BD-J applica- discs. Usually, one movie, one album, tion) or one audio program is assigned as a title. For BD-Videos that come as a 2 disc set or more, after finishing and ejecting one of the discs, continuation of the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 221
video can be seen shortly after replac- Code Language ing the disc with the proper disc. 0113 Amharic Playlist (BDAV only) 0118 Arabic 0119 Assamese A playlist of favorite scenes by Blu-ray Disc™ recorder can be created and 0125 Aymara the scenes can playback via playlist. 0126 Azerbaijani 0201 Bashkir Audio 0205 Belorussian 4 This player can play Linear PCM, 0207 Bulgarian Audio/visual system Dolby Digital, DTS and MPEG audio format. Other decoded types cannot 0208 Bihari be played. 0209 Bislama 0214 Bengali, Bangla Language codes list 0215 Tibetan Code Language 0218 Breton 0514 English 0301 Catalan 1001 Japanese 0315 Corsican 0618 French 0319 Czech 0405 German 0325 Welsh 0920 Italian 0401 Danish 0519 Spanish 0426 Bhutani 2608 Chinese 0515 Esperanto 1412 Dutch 0520 Estonian 1620 Portuguese 0521 Basque 1922 Swedish 0601 Persian 1821 Russian 0609 Finnish 1115 Korean 0610 Fiji 0512 Greek 0615 Faroese 0101 Afar 0625 Frisian 0102 Abkhazian 0701 Irish 0106 Afrikaans 0704 Scottish-Gaelic
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 222 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
Code Language Code Language 0712 Galician 1222 Latvian, Lettish 0714 Guarani 1307 Malagasy 0721 Gujarati 1309 Maori 0801 Hausa 1311 Macedonian 0809 Hindi 1312 Malayalam 0818 Croatian 1314 Mongolian 0821 Hungarian 1315 Moldavian 0825 Armenian 1318 Marathi 0901 Interlingua 1319 Malay 0905 Interlingue 1320 Maltese 0911 Inupiak 1325 Burmese 0914 Indonesian 1401 Nauru 0919 Icelandic 1405 Nepali 0921 Inuktitut 1415 Norwegian 0923 Hebrew 1503 Occitan 1009 Yiddish 1513 (Afan) Oromo 1023 Javanese 1518 Oriya 1101 Georgian 1601 Punjabi 1111 Kazakh 1612 Polish 1112 Greenlandic 1619 Pashto, Pushto 1113 Cambodian 1721 Quechua 1114 Kannada 1813 Rhaeto-Romance 1119 Kashmiri 1814 Kirundi 1121 Kurdish 1815 Romanian 1125 Kirghiz 1823 Kinyarwanda 1201 Latin 1901 Sanskrit 1214 Lingala 1904 Sindhi 1215 Laotian 1907 Sango 1220 Lithuanian 1908 Serbo-Croatian
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 223
Code Language Code Language 1909 Sinhalese 2209 Vietnamese 1911 Slovak 2215 Volapük 1912 Slovenian 2315 Wolof 1913 Samoan 2408 Xhosa 1914 Shona 2515 Yoruba 1915 Somali 2601 Zhuang 1917 Albanian 2621 Zulu 4
1918 Serbian Audio/visual system 1919 Siswati SD card 1920 Sesotho SD cards that can be used 1921 Sundanese 1923 Swahili Memory cards are restricted to the following sizes based on SD stan- 2001 Tamil dards. 2005 Telugu • SD: From 512 MB to 2 GB 2007 Tajik • SDHC: From 4 GB to 32 GB 2008 Thai • SDXC: From 48 GB to 512 GB 2009 Tigrinya Mini SD cards and Micro SD cards can be used, but must be used with 2011 Turkmen an adaptor card. 2012 Tagalog Multi Media Card (MMC) cannot 2014 Setswana be used. 2015 Tongan WARNING 2018 Turkish ●SD cards: Keep away from children. 2019 Tsonga These are small and if swallowed by a child they can cause choking. 2020 Tatar 2023 Twi NOTICE 2107 Uighur ●SD card precaution: Failure to follow the precautions below may result in 2111 Ukrainian damage to the SD cards or the SD card slot. 2118 Urdu • Do not insert anything other than an 2126 Uzbek SD card into the SD card slot.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 224 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
NOTICE Compatibility • Do not stick labels or stickers on SD card. There is a possibility that it may Compatible files become impossible to eject the SD card from inside the slot. Music file for- MP3/WMA/AAC file • Do not handle an SD card with wet mat types: →P.215 hands. Doing so may cause electric shock or a malfunction. MPEG-4 Video, • Do not allow hands or metal objects to H.264/AVC Video (.mp4/.m4v), MPEG-2 contact the interface pins of SD cards. Video file for- Video (.mpg), Windows mat • Do not place SD cards on the instru- Media Video (.wmv), AVI ment panel, on any place with direct sunlight or in areas with a lot of mois- container (.avi), M2TS ture. (.m2ts), 3GP (.3gp) JPEG (Gray scale JPEG • Do not use SD cards in any place Photo file for- where static electricity or electric and Motion JPEG are not mat noise adversely affects SD cards. This supported.) may cause data corruption or data loss. Pixel size Between 1 × 1 and 8192 × (photo) 8192 pixels • Always place the SD card in its storage case when not in use. WAV file compatibility SD card functions Compatible 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/ Local storage sampling fre- 24/32/44.1/48/88.2/ • Some BD videos have a feature to mem- quencies 96/176.4/192 (kHz) orize disc information, such as a resume Quantization 16/24 (bit) point, in a local storage. The rear seat bit rate entertainment system uses an SD card as a local storage device. To use this function, insert an SD card into the SD FLAC file compatibility card slot. Compatible 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/ • The SD card memory function may differ sampling fre- 24/32/44.1/48/88.2/ depending on the BD videos played. quencies 96/176.4/192 (kHz) • When an SD card that contains any kind Quantization of data is inserted, BD video disc infor- 16/24 (bit) mation will not be stored into the SD bit rate card to protect the existing data in the card. To use an SD card as a local stor- age, use another SD card that does not contain any data.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 225
ALAC file compatibility MPEG-4 AAC-LC (AAC Audio codec Low Complexity) Compatible 8/11.025/12/16/22.05/ Resolution Maximum 1920 x 1080 sampling fre- 24/32/44.1/48/64/ (pixel) quencies 88.2/96 (kHz) Bit rate Maximum 20Mbps Quantization 16/24 (bit) bit rate Interlaced video: Maxi- mum 60 fps Frame rate OGG Vorbis file compatibility Progressive video: Maxi- mum 30 fps 4 Compatible
8/11.025/16/22.05/32/ Audio/visual system sampling fre- MPEG-2 44.1/48 (kHz) quencies Compatible 32-500 (kbps) Variable Profile MP@HL, MP@ML bit rates Bit Rate (VBR) compatible MPEG-2 PS (Program Video codec Stream) MPEG-4 MPEG-1 Audio Layer 2, Audio codec Dolby Digital Simple Profile, Advanced Resolution Profile Maximum 1920 x 1080 Simple Profile (pixel) Video codec MPEG-4 Video Bit rate Maximum 12Mbps MPEG-4 AAC-LC (AAC Audio codec Interlaced video: Maxi- Low Complexity) mum 60 fps Frame rate Resolution Maximum 1920 x 1080 Progressive video: Maxi- (pixel) mum 30 fps Bit rate Maximum 6Mbps Interlaced video: Maxi- Windows Media Video (WMV) mum 60 fps Frame rate Simple Profile, Main Pro- Progressive video: Maxi- Profile file, Advanced Profile mum 30 fps Video codec WMV (VC-1) H.264/AVC WMA (WMA Professional Audio codec and Lossless are not sup- Baseline Profile, Main Pro- ported.) Profile file, High Profile Resolution Maximum 1920 x 1080 Video codec H.264/AVC Video (pixel)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 226 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
Simple and Main Profile: SD-Video H.264 mobile video pro- Maximum 15Mbps file Bit rate Advanced Profile: Maxi- mum 20Mbps Profile Baseline Profile Interlaced video: Maxi- Video codec H.264/AVC Video mum 60 fps Frame rate Audio codec MPEG-4 AAC Progressive video: Maxi- mum 30 fps Resolution 640 x 480 and 640 x (pixel) 360 Video: Maximum 1.5Mbps, AVI container Bit rate Audio: Maximum 128kbps Refer to other tables in this Frame rate 30 fps section for compatible Profile MPEG-4, H.264/AV ●For information on how to create a video Cand WMV profiles. file, refer to the manual that comes with the encoder software to be used. Video: H.264/AVC Video Depending on the encoder software Audio: MPEG-4 used, some video files may not be played To be played AAC-LC, MP3 back. back video Video: MPEG-4 Video and audio Audio: MPEG-4 SD cards codec AAC-LC, MP3 An SD card is not provided with the Video: WMV (VC-1) rear seat entertainment system and Audio: MP3 needs to be purchased separately. Resolution Maximum 1920 x 1080 (pixel) Compatible formats: This system is compatible with SD memory cards Refer to other tables in this that meet SD card specifications section for compatible Bit rate FAT16 formats, SDHC memory MPEG-4, H.264/AV Cand WMV profiles. cards in FAT32 format, and SDXC memory cards in exFAT format. Interlaced video: Maxi- mum 60 fps Panasonic SD memory card format Frame rate software version 4.0 or higher is Progressive video: Maxi- mum 30 fps recommended. Data stored on an SD card may be lost. Before playing back pictures and videos stored on an SD card, make certain to back up the data. Before an SD card that contains any kind of data is played, slide the lock
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system 227
switch on the SD card to “LOCK” in JPEG (Gray scale JPEG Photo file for- order to prevent any data from and Motion JPEG are not mat being accidentally deleted or over- supported.) written. Pixel size Between 1 × 1 and 8192 × When discarding or transferring (photo) 8192 pixels ownership of an SD card: When using format or delete functions on A/V input port this system or a personal computer, file management data changes but the data on the SD card is not com- Operating audio/visual equip- 4 pletely erased. Destroying the body ment connected to the system Audio/visual system of the SD card or using commercial The volume can be adjusted using the computer software that erases data vehicle’s audio controls. All other oper- is recommended when discarding ations must be made on the or transferring ownership of an SD audio/visual equipment itself. card to completely erase the data For details about operation of stored on the card. The manage- audio/visual equipment, refer to the ment of data stored on an SD card is manufacturer’s instructions. the customer’s responsibility. ●HDMI compatible format DLNA • Compatible video signal: 480p, 576p, VGA • Compatible sound signal: LPCM 2ch Compatibility NOTICE Compatible files ●When the A/V input port is not in use: Keep the A/V input port cover closed. Inserting anything other than an Music file for- MP3/WMA/AAC file appropriate plug may cause electrical mat types: →P.215 failure or a short circuit. MPEG-4 Video, H.264/AVC Video (.mp4/.m4v), MPEG-2 Video file for- Video (.mpg), Windows mat Media Video (.wmv), AVI container (.avi), M2TS (.m2ts), 3GP (.3gp)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 228 4-10. Tips for operating rear seat entertainment system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 229 Voice command system 5
5-1.. Voice command system opera- tion Voice command system...... 230 Natural language understanding ...... 233 Command list ...... 233 5-2. Mobile Assistant operation Mobile Assistant...... 238 5 Voice command system Voice command
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 230 5-1. Voice command system operation
5-1.Voice command system operation Voice command system ●Voice commands may not be recognized if: • Spoken too quickly. The voice command system • Spoken at a low or high volume. enables the radio, phone dialing, • The roof or windows are open. etc. to be operated using voice • Passengers are talking while voice com- mands are spoken. commands. Refer to the command • The fan speed of the air conditioning sys- list for samples of voice commands. tem is set at high. (→P.233) • The air conditioning vents are turned towards the microphone. ●In the following conditions, the system Using the voice command sys- may not recognize the command prop- erly and using voice commands may not tem be possible: • The command is incorrect or unclear. ■ Steering switch Note that certain words, accents or speech patterns may be difficult for the system to recognize. • There is excessive background noise, such as wind noise. ●Normally, it is necessary to wait for a beep before saying a command. To enable the ability to talk over prompts and say commands before the beep, enable the voice prompt interrupt func- tion. (→P.57) ●This system may not operate immediately A after the engine switch
Voice command system opera- tion
The voice command system is oper- ated by saying commands which cor- respond to a supported function. To display examples of commands for supported functions, select a function It is unnecessary to speak directly button on the screen after starting the into the microphone when giving a voice command system. command.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 5-1. Voice command system operation 231
Operation from the main menu screen. To cancel voice recognition, select 1 Press the talk switch. , say “Cancel”, or press and hold the talk switch. To perform the voice command operation again, select “Start Over” or say “Start over”. To suspend voice command opera- tion, select “Pause”. To resume the voice command operation, select “Resume” or press the talk switch. Voice guidance for the voice com- 5 mand system can be skipped by ●If the system does not respond or the
pressing the talk switch. confirmation screen does not disappear, system Voice command press the talk switch and try again. 2 If “Getting Started with Voice” ●If a voice command cannot be recog- screen is displayed, select “OK” or nized, voice guidance will say “Sorry, press the talk switch. (→P.231) could you repeat that?” and voice com- mand reception will restart. 3 After hearing a beep, say a sup- ●If a voice command cannot be recog- ported command. nized 3 consecutive times, voice recogni- To display sample commands of the tion will be canceled. ● desired function, say the desired The amount of spoken feedback received from the system while using the voice function or select the desired func- command system (voice recognition tion button. To display more com- prompts) can be changed on the voice → mands, select “More Commands”. settings screen. ( P.57) ●Some voice guidance can be canceled by Selecting “Help” or saying “Help” setting voice prompts to off. Use this set- prompts the voice command system ting when it is desirable to say a com- mand immediately after pressing the talk to offer examples of commands and switch and hearing a beep. operation methods. Registered POIs, registered names Increasing the voice recognition in the contacts list etc., can be said in performance the place of the “<>” next to the com- mands. (→P.233) To increase voice recognition perfor- mance, use the “Tutorials” and “Voice For example: Say “Find a restaurant”, “Call Training” functions on the “Getting John Smith” etc. Started with Voice” screen. These If a desired outcome is not shown, or functions are only available when the if no selections are available, say vehicle is not moving. “Go back” to return to the previous The “Tutorials” and “Voice Training”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 232 5-1. Voice command system operation
functions can also be started on the 1 Select . voice settings screen. (→P.57) 1 Press the talk switch. 2 Select the desired item to be set.
2 Speak to the system. Words recognized through your speech will be displayed. To confirm A Select to display the voice com- the entered text, select “OK”. mand tutorials. ● B A keyboard screen will not be displayed Select to train the voice command when the vehicle is being driven. system. ●Text message reply with the dictation The user will be asked to say 10 sample function may not be available depending phrases. This will help the voice command on the type of cellular phone. system adapt to the user’s accent. C Select to prevent the screen from being displayed again. D Select to proceed to the voice command screen.
Dictation function (English only)*
*: With navigation function Text messages can be written using the dictation function. To use the dictation function, a sub- scription to the Lexus Enform is neces- sary. Contact your Lexus dealer for details.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 5-1. Voice command system operation 233
Natural language under- Command list standing* Command list overview *: With navigation function Due to natural language speech Recognizable voice commands and recognition technology, this system their actions are shown below. recognizes commands when spo- Frequently used commands are ken naturally. (If a Lexus Enform listed in the following tables. subscription has been entered, the For devices that are not installed to system will be able to connect to the vehicle, commands relating to the Lexus Enform center and the that device may not be displayed on range of naturally spoken English the screen. Also, depending on 5 which can be recognized will be other conditions, such as compati- increased.) However, the system bility, some commands may not be system Voice command cannot recognize every variation of displayed on the screen. each command. In some situations, it is possible to omit the command The functions available may vary for the procedure and directly state according to the system installed. the desired operation. Not all voice Voice recognition language can be commands are displayed in the changed. (→P.53) function menu. To use this function, a subscription Command list to the Lexus Enform is necessary. ■ Common Contact your Lexus dealer for details. Command Action Displays examples “Help” of some of the avail- able commands Returns to the previ- “Go Back” ous screen Cancels the voice “Cancel” command system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 234 5-1. Voice command system operation
Command Action Command Action Returns to top menu Displays a list of “Start over” “Find a
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 5-1. Voice command system operation 235 *6: Major national brands are always sup- ■ While in a phone call ported. Local brands are also sup- ported with a subscription to the Lexus Command Action Enform. Contact your Lexus dealer for Sends DTMF tones “Send
Places a call to the system Voice command Command Action “Call
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 236 5-1. Voice command system operation
Command Action Command Action Changes the radio “Play Composer Plays tracks from the “Play a
*1: A station list must be built first using the Command Action radio screen (→P.112) Displays weather *2 “Get the Forecast” : Requires a satellite radio subscription information * ■ Audio “Get the Forecast Displays weather for for
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 5-1. Voice command system operation 237
Command Action Command Action Displays traffic infor- Increases or “Increase Tempera- “Show Traffic on this mation along road decreases the tem- ture/ Decrease street” you are currently perature of the air Temperature” driving on conditioning system Displays traffic infor- Increases or “Show Traffic for “Increase Fan mation for a saved decreases the fan saved route” speed/Decrease route speed of the air con- Fan speed” ditioning system “Show Predictive Displays the predic- Traffic” tive traffic map Displays the screen “Show the front to control the air *1 climate control :With navigation function conditioning or seat screen” *2: Only major US cities are supported by heating system 5 voice
Displays the screen system Voice command ■ Apps “Set the steering to control the air wheel temperature” conditioning or seat Command Action heating system Activates the Lexus Displays the screen * “Launch
Changes the set fan ●Commands relating to operation of the “Change the Fan speed of the air con- audio/visual and air conditioning systems speed to <#>” ditioning system to can only be performed when the audio <#> and air conditioning systems are turned on. Changes the set “Set temperature to temperature of the <#> degrees” air conditioning sys- tem to <#> degrees*
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 238 5-2. Mobile Assistant operation
5-2.Mobile Assistant operation Mobile Assistant Mobile Assistant operation
1 Press and hold this switch until The Mobile Assistant function is a Mobile Assistant screen is dis- voice input assist function. Mobile played. Assist supports the Siri Eyes Free Mode and Google App. (Google App can be used only the corre- sponding device.) Instructions can be spoken into the vehicle micro- phone as if speaking a command to the phone. The content of the request is then interpreted by the phone and the result is output from the vehicle speakers. To operate 2 The Mobile Assistant can be used the Mobile Assistant, a compatible only when the following screen is device must be registered and con- displayed. nected to this system via Bluetooth®. (→P.38)
Connectable devices and avail- able functions
Mobile Assist supports the Siri Eyes Free Mode and Google App. The available features and functions may To cancel the Mobile Assistant, vary based on the iOS/Android version select “Cancel” or press and hold installed on the connected device. the switch on the steering wheel. To restart the Mobile Assistant for additional commands, press the switch on the steering wheel. • Mobile Assistant can only be restarted after the system responds to a voice command. • After some phone and music com- mands, the Mobile Assistant feature will automatically end to complete the requested action.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 5-2. Mobile Assistant operation 239 The volume of the Mobile Assistant can be adjusted using the “PWR/VOL” knob or steering wheel volume control switches. The Mobile Assistant and phone call vol- umes are synchronized.
●While a phone call is active, the Mobile Assistant cannot be used. ●If using the navigation feature of the cellu- lar phone, ensure the active audio source is Bluetooth® audio or iPod in order to hear turn by turn direction prompts. ●Wait for the listening beeps before using 5 the Mobile Assistant.
●The Mobile Assistant may not recognize system Voice command commands in the following situations: • Spoken too quickly. • Spoken at a low or high volume. • The roof or windows are open. • Passengers are talking while the Mobile Assistant is being used. • The fan speed of the air conditioning sys- tem is set at high. • The air conditioning vents are turned toward the microphone.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 240 5-2. Mobile Assistant operation
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 241 Information 6
6-1.. Information display Receiving weather information ...... 242 Data services settings...... 244
6 Information
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 242 6-1. Information display
6-1.Information display Receiving weather informa- specific day, select the date. tion* C Select to display the weather infor- mation for the next 6 hours and 12 *: With navigation function hours. (This button is not displayed Weather information can be when a location is selected from the received via HD Radio broadcast “National Cities” list of “National/ or DCM (Data Communication Local”.) Module). D Select to display the weather of a desired location in the recently Displaying weather screen checked locations list. E Select to change the displayed 1 Press the “MENU” button on the weather location. A location can be Remote Touch. selected from two different lists: a list of national cities and a list of local cities. (→P.243) F Select to display Doppler weather radar information over the map.
●This function is not made available in some countries or areas. ●The weather for current location might not show the closest city when it first dis- 2 Select “Info”. plays. 3 Select “Weather”. ●The weather information is updated every 5 to 90 minutes. The time elapsed 4 Check that the weather screen is since the last update is displayed at the displayed. bottom right corner of the screen. If the weather has been updated less than 5 minutes ago, “Now” will be displayed.
Displaying weather information for the current location
1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Info”. A Select to display the current 3 Select “Weather”. weather information. (→P.242) 4 Select “Current”. B Select to display a 3-day weather 5 Check the weather information for forecast for the currently displayed the current location. location. To view the details of a
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 6-1. Information display 243 By selecting “3 Day” or “6/12 around the current position, destina- Hour”, different types of weather tion, or along the set route is available, information for the current location important information will be output will be displayed. through the speakers and a pop-up message asking if you would like to Selecting a location view the full weather information will be displayed. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 1 Select “Yes” when the pop-up mes- Remote Touch. sage appears. 2 Select “Info”. 2 Check that the weather informa- 3 Select “Weather”. tion is displayed. 4 Select “National/Local”. The time since the information was 5 Select the desired item to be set. last updated is displayed. When detailed audio weather infor- mation is available, an icon will be 6 displayed on the weather map. Select the icon to listen to the Information weather information.
A Select to display the list of National cities. When the list is displayed, select the desired area. B Select to display the list of local cit- ies. 6 Select the desired location from the list. After selecting a location, the cur- rent weather information will be dis- played. By selecting “3 Day” or “6/12 Hour”, the different type of weather information for the selected location is displayed.
Weather guidance service
When weather information for areas
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 244 6-1. Information display
Data services settings* cast and the DCM. When both methods are available, HD Radio *: With navigation function broadcast will be selected. Data service information, which is B Select to receive data only via HD comprised of traffic information Radio broadcast. and weather information, can be received via HD Radio broadcast ●This function is not made available in some countries or areas. or DCM (Data Communication Module). The receiving method can be set to both or only via HD Radio broadcast.
Setting download methods
1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch.
2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Data Services”. 4 Select “Data Download Source”. 5 Select the desired item to be set.
A Select to receive data service infor- mation via both HD Radio broad-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 245 Peripheral monitoring system 7
7-1.. Lexus parking assist monitor Lexus parking assist monitor ...... 246 Estimated course line display mode...... 249 Parking assist guide line display mode...... 250 Distance guide line display mode ...... 251 Lexus parking assist monitor pre- cautions...... 252 Things you should know...... 256 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 7 Panoramic view monitor...... 258
Checking around the vehicle Peripheral moni ...... 264 Checking the front and around the vehicle ...... 265
Checking the sides of the vehicle toring system ...... 268 Checking the rear and around the vehicle...... 273 When folding the outside rear view mirrors...... 279 Magnifying function ...... 280 Customizing the panoramic view monitor...... 281 Panoramic view monitor precau- tions...... 282 Things you should know...... 291
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 246 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor
7-1.Lexus parking assist monitor Lexus parking assist moni- WARNING * tor ●Never depend on the parking assist monitor entirely when backing up. The *:If equipped image and the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may dif- The parking assist monitor assists fer from the actual state. the driver by displaying an image of Use caution, just as you would when the view behind the vehicle while backing up any vehicle. backing up, for example while park- ●Be sure to back up slowly, depressing ing. the brake pedal to control vehicle speed. When the display is changed to the ●If you seem likely to hit nearby vehicles, wide rear view mode, a wider lat- obstacles, people or mount the shoul- eral view behind the vehicle will be der, depress the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. displayed. ●The instructions given are only guide- ● lines. When and how much to turn the The screen illustrations used in this text steering wheel will vary according to are intended as examples, and may differ traffic conditions, road surface condi- from the image that is actually displayed tions, vehicle condition, etc. when on the screen. parking. It is necessary to be fully aware of this before using the parking Driving precautions assist system. ●When parking, be sure to check that The parking assist monitor is a supple- the parking space will accommodate mental device intended to assist the your vehicle before maneuvering into driver when backing up. When back- it. ing up, be sure to visually check all ●Do not use the parking assist monitor around the vehicle both directly and in the following cases: using the mirrors before proceeding. If • On icy or slick road surfaces, or in snow you do not, you may hit another vehi- cle, and could possibly cause an acci- • When using tire chains or emergency dent. tires • When the trunk is not closed com- Pay attention to the following precau- pletely tions when using the parking assist monitor. • On roads that are not flat or straight, such as curves or slopes • If the suspension has been modified or tires of a size other than specified are installed
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor 247
are switched. WARNING B Guide line switching button ●In low temperatures, the screen may darken or the image may become Select to switch the guide line mode. faint. The image could distort when the (→P.248) vehicle is moving, or you may become • Each time the button is selected, the dis- unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all around the play mode changes in the following vehicle both directly and using the mir- order: rors before proceeding. Estimated course line display mode → ●If the tire sizes are changed, the posi- Parking assist guide line display mode → tion of the guide lines displayed on the Distance guide line display mode. screen may change. C Rear Cross Traffic Alert ●The camera uses a special lens. The When a sensor detects an obstacle, the distances between objects and pedes- direction of obstacle is displayed and the trians that appear in the image dis- played on the screen will differ from buzzer sounds. the actual distances. (→P.253) D Intuitive parking assist When a sensor detects an obstacle, the Screen display direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the The parking assist monitor screen will buzzer sounds. 7 be displayed if the shift position is Wide rear view shifted to the “R” while the engine Peripheral moni Displays a near 180° image from the rear switch
button is selected, the mode will toring system change as follows:
Rear view Displays the rear view of the vehicle.
A Display mode switching button Each time the button is selected, the rear view mode and the wide rear view mode are switched. B Guide line switching button Select to switch the guide line mode. → A Display mode switching button ( P.248) • Each time the button is selected, the dis- Each time the button is selected, the rear play mode changes in the following view mode and the wide rear view mode order:
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 248 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor
Estimated course line display mode → Parking assist guide line display mode → Distance guide line display mode. C Rear Cross Traffic Alert When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed and the buzzer sounds. D Intuitive parking assist When a sensor detects an obstacle, the Estimated course line display mode direction of and the approximate distance (→P.249) to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the ●For details about the Rear Cross Traffic operation of the steering wheel. Alert function and intuitive parking assist, refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
WARNING ●As the Rear Cross Traffic Alert display is displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the Rear Cross Traffic Alert display depending on the color and brightness of the surround- ing area. Parking assist guide line display → Canceling Lexus parking assist mode ( P.250) monitor The steering wheel return points (park- ing assist guide lines) are displayed. The parking assist monitor is canceled when the shift position is shifted into This mode is recommended for those any position other than the “R”. who are comfortable with parking the vehicle without the aid of the estimated course lines. Using the system
Use any of the following modes.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor 249
Distance guide line display mode Estimated course line display → ( P.251) mode Distance guide lines only are dis- played. Screen description This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the Rear view vehicle without the aid of the guide lines.
A Vehicle width guide line Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. B Estimated course lines 7 Show an estimated course when the steer-
ing wheel is turned. Peripheral moni C Distance guide lines Show distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned. • The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines. toring system • The guide lines display points approxi- mately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approxi- mately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper. D Distance guide line Shows distance behind the vehicle. • Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the bumper. E Vehicle center guide line Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 250 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor
Wide rear view Parking assist guide line dis- play mode
Screen description
Rear view
A Vehicle width guide line Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. B Estimated course lines Show an estimated course when the steer- ing wheel is turned. A Vehicle width guide line C Distance guide lines Displays a guide path when the vehicle is Show distance behind the vehicle when the being backed straight up. steering wheel is turned. • The displayed width is wider than the • The guide lines move in conjunction with actual vehicle width. the estimated course lines. B Parking assist guide lines • The guide lines display points approxi- Show the path of the smallest turn possible mately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approxi- behind the vehicle. mately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the C center of the edge of the bumper. Distance guide line D Distance guide line Shows distance behind the vehicle. • Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 Shows distance behind the vehicle. m) (red) from the edge of the bumper. • Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. D (0.5 m) (blue) from the edge of the Vehicle center guide line bumper. Indicates the estimated vehicle center on E Vehicle center guide line the ground. Indicates the estimated vehicle center on Wide rear view the ground.
WARNING ●If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the esti- mated course lines are not in align- ment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
A Vehicle width guide line
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor 251
Displays a guide path when the vehicle is Distance guide line display being backed straight up. • The displayed width is wider than the mode actual vehicle width. B Parking assist guide lines Screen description Show the path of the smallest turn possible Rear view behind the vehicle. C Distance guide line Shows distance behind the vehicle. • Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper. D Vehicle center guide line Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground. A Distance guide lines Shows distance behind the vehicle. • Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper. 7 Wide rear view Peripheral moni toring system
A Distance guide lines Shows distance behind the vehicle. • Displays points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) from the edge of the bumper.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 252 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor
Lexus parking assist moni- Wide rear view tor precautions
Area displayed on screen
The parking assist monitor displays an image of the view from the bumper of the rear area of the vehicle.
Rear view
A Corners of bumper • The area around both corners of the bumper will not be displayed.
●The image adjustment procedure for the parking assist monitor screen is the same as the procedure for adjusting the screen display. (→P.55) ●The area displayed on the screen may vary according to vehicle orientation A Corners of bumper conditions. • The area around both corners of the ●Objects which are close to either corner bumper will not be displayed. of the bumper or under the bumper can- not be displayed. ●The camera uses a special lens. The dis- tance of the image that appears on the screen differs from the actual distance. ●Items which are located higher than the camera may not be displayed on the monitor.
The camera
The camera for the parking assist mon- itor is located as shown in the illustra-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor 253
tion. • If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on the vehicle in cold weather, the system may not operate normally. • When washing the vehicle, do not apply intensive bursts of water to the camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. ●Do not expose the camera to strong impact as this could cause a malfunc- tion. If this happens, have the vehicle ■ Using the camera inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible. If dirt or foreign matter (such as water droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering Differences between the screen to the camera, it cannot transmit a clear image. In this case, flush it with a and the actual road large quantity of water and wipe the The distance guide lines and the camera lens clean with a soft and wet vehicle width guide lines may not cloth. actually be parallel with the dividing 7 lines of the parking space, even NOTICE
when they appear to be so. Be sure Peripheral moni ●The parking assist monitor may not operate properly in the following to check visually. cases. The distances between the vehicle • If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi- width guide lines and the left and tion and mounting angle of the camera right dividing lines of the parking
may change. toring system space may not be equal, even when • As the camera has a water proof con- they appear to be so. Be sure to struction, do not detach, disassemble or modify it. This may cause incorrect check visually. operation. The distance guide lines give a dis- • When cleaning the camera lens, flush tance guide for flat road surfaces. In the camera with a large quantity of any of the following situations, there water and wipe it with a soft and wet cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera is a margin of error between the lens may cause the camera lens to be guide lines on the screen and the scratched and unable to transmit a clear image. actual distance/course on the road. ■ When the ground behind the vehi- • Do not allow organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to cle slopes up sharply adhere to the camera. If this happens, wipe it off as soon as possible. The distance guide lines will appear to be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 254 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor appear to be farther away than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual dis- tance/course on the road.
■ When any part of the vehicle sags When any part of the vehicle sags due to the number of passengers or the dis- tribution of the load, there is a margin of error between the guide lines on the ■ When the ground behind the vehi- screen and the actual distance/course cle slopes down sharply on the road. The distance guide lines will appear to be farther from the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will appear to be closer than they actually are. In the same way, there will be a margin of error between the guidelines and the actual dis- tance/course on the road.
A A margin of error
When approaching three-dimensional objects
The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor 255 not possible to determine the position ■ Distance guide lines of three-dimensional objects (such as Visually check the surroundings and vehicles) using the estimated course the area behind the vehicle. On the lines and distance guide lines. When screen, it appears that a truck is park- approaching a three-dimensional ing at point B . However, in reality if object that extends outward (such as you back up to point A , you will hit the the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the truck. On the screen, it appears that following. A is closest and C is farthest away. ■ Estimated course lines However, in reality, the distance to A Visually check the surroundings and and C is the same, and B is farther the area behind the vehicle. In the case than A and C . shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated course lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the estimated course lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the estimated 7 course lines, the vehicle may hit the
truck. Peripheral moni toring system
A Estimated course lines
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 256 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor
Things you should know
If you notice any symptoms
If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solu- tion, and re-check. If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Symptom Likely cause Solution • The vehicle is in a dark area • The temperature around the lens is either high or low Back up while visually check- • The outside temperature is ing the vehicle’s surroundings. low (Use the monitor again once • There are water droplets conditions have been on the camera improved.) • It is raining or humid The image is difficult to see • Foreign matter (mud etc.) is The procedure for adjusting adhering to the camera the picture quality of the • Sunlight or headlights are parking assist monitor is the shining directly into the same as the procedure for camera adjusting the screen display. → • The vehicle is under fluo- ( P.55) rescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights etc. Dirt or foreign matter (such Flush the camera with a large as water droplets, snow, mud quantity of water and wipe The image is blurry etc.) is adhering to the cam- the camera lens clean with a era. soft and wet cloth. The camera or surrounding The image is out of align- Have the vehicle inspected by area has received a strong ment your Lexus dealer. impact. The camera position is out of Have the vehicle inspected by alignment. your Lexus dealer. • The vehicle is tilted (there is If this happens due to these The guide lines are very far a heavy load on the vehicle, out of alignment causes, it does not indicate a tire pressure is low due to a malfunction. tire puncture, etc.) • The vehicle is used on an Back up while visually check- incline. ing the vehicle’s surroundings.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-1. Lexus parking assist monitor 257
Symptom Likely cause Solution The estimated course lines There is a malfunction in the Have the vehicle inspected by move even though the signals being output by the your Lexus dealer. steering wheel is straight steering sensor. Close the trunk.
Guide lines are not dis- If this does not resolve the The trunk is open. played symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. • 12-volt battery has been reinstalled. • The steering wheel has been moved while the Stop the vehicle, and turn the 12-volt battery was being steering wheel as far as it will reinstalled. go to the left and right. The estimated course lines • 12-volt battery power is are not displayed If this does not resolve the low. symptom, have the vehicle • The steering sensor has inspected by your Lexus been reinstalled. dealer. 7 • There is a malfunction in
the signals being output by Peripheral moni the steering sensor. toring system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 258 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
7-2.Panoramic view monitor Panoramic view monitor* WARNING ● * Never depend on the panoramic view :If equipped monitor entirely. The image and the Panoramic view monitor assists the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may differ from the actual driver in viewing the surroundings, state. Use caution just as you would when operating at low speeds, by when driving any other vehicle. combining the front, side and rear ●Always make sure to check all around cameras and displaying a complete the vehicle with your own eyes when vehicle overhead image on the driving. screen. ●Never drive while looking only at the screen as the image on the screen is When you press the camera switch different from actual conditions. If you or shift the shift lever to the “R” are driving while looking only at the screen, you may hit a person or an position while the engine switch object, resulting in an accident. When
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 259
WARNING ●The panoramic view/moving view/see-through view/Side Clear- ●In low temperatures, the screen may ance View/Cornering View display darken or the image may become does not extend higher than the instal- faint. The image could distort when the lation position and image capture vehicle is moving, or you may become range of each camera. unable to see the image on the screen. Be sure to visually check all around the ●There are blind spots around the vehi- vehicle both directly and using the mir- cle. Accordingly, there are regions not rors before proceeding. displayed in panoramic view/moving view/see-through view/Side Clear- ●If the tire sizes are changed, the posi- ance View/Cornering View. tion of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change. ●Three-dimensional objects displayed in wide front view, rear view or side ●The camera uses a special lens. The view may not be displayed in pan- distances between objects and pedes- oramic view/moving view/see-through trians that appear in the image dis- view/Side Clearance View/Cornering played on the screen will differ from View. the actual distances. (→P.286) ●People and other three-dimensional obstacles may appear differently when NOTICE displayed on the panoramic view mon- itor. (These differences include, among ●In panoramic view/moving others, cases in which displayed 7 view/see-through view/Side Clear- objects appear to have fallen over, dis- ance View/Cornering View, the sys- appear near image processing areas, tem combines images taken from the appear from image processing areas, Peripheral moni front, back, left and right side cameras or when the actual distance to an into a single image. There are limits to object differs from the displayed posi- the range and content that can be dis- tion.) played. Familiarize yourself with the characteristics of the panoramic view ●When the trunk, which is equipped
monitor system before using it. with the back camera, or front doors, toring system which are equipped with door mirrors ●Image clarity may decline at the four that have built-in side cameras, are corners of the panoramic view/mov- open, images will not be displayed ing view/see-through view/Side Clear- properly on the panoramic view moni- ance View/Cornering View. However, tor. this is not a malfunction, as these are the regions along the border of each ●The vehicle icon displayed in pan- camera image where the images are oramic view/moving view/see-through combined. view/Side Clearance View/Cornering View is a computer generated image. ●Depending on lighting conditions near Accordingly, properties such as the each of the cameras, bright and dark color, shape and size will differ from patches may appear on the panoramic the actual vehicle. For this reason, view/moving view/see-through nearby three-dimensional objects may view/Side Clearance View/Cornering appear to be touching the vehicle, and View. actual distances to three-dimensional objects may differ from those dis- played.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 260 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Camera switch Checking the front and around the vehicle The camera switch is located as shown in the illustration. Wide front view & panoramic view
Checking the sides and around Display the vehicle
Side Clearance View & panoramic Checking around the vehicle view
Moving view
Cornering View & panoramic view
See-through view
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 261
Checking the rear and around When folding the outside rear the vehicle view mirrors
Rear view & panoramic view Wide front view & side views
Wide rear view & panoramic view Rear view & side views
7 Peripheral moni
Wide rear view & side views toring system
How to switch the display
When you press the camera switch or shift the shift lever to the “R” position while the engine switch
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 262 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
When the shift lever is in the “P” position
A Map screen, audio screen, etc. B Moving view C See-through view
When the shift lever is in the “D” or “N” position
A Map screen, audio screen, etc. B Wide front view & panoramic view
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 263
C Side Clearance View & panoramic view D Cornering View & panoramic view E When the steering wheel is turned by 180° or more from the center (straight-line) position
When the shift lever is in the “R” position
7 Peripheral moni A Rear view & panoramic view B Wide rear view & panoramic view toring system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 264 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Checking around the vehicle C Body color setting switch Select to display the body color setting The moving view screen and the screen and change the color of the vehicle displayed on the panoramic view monitor. see-through view screen provide (→P.281) support when checking the areas of around the vehicle while parking. See-through view These screens display an image of the vicinity of the vehicle combined from the 4 cameras. The screen will display a 360° view around the vehicle from either inside the vehi- cle or from a birds-eye view at an angle.
To display the moving A Display mode switching button view/see-through view screen, Select to change the display mode press the camera switch when the between the moving view and the shift lever is in the “P” position and see-through view. the intuitive parking assist is B Rotation pause switch enabled. Select to pause the rotation of the screen. To resume rotation, select . Screen display C Body color setting switch Moving view Select to display the body color setting screen and change the color of the vehicle displayed on the panoramic view monitor. (→P.281)
●Pressing the camera switch again changes the screen back to the previ- ously displayed screen, such as the navi- gation screen.
A Display mode switching button Select to change the display mode between the moving view and the see-through view. B Rotation pause switch Select to pause the rotation of the screen. To resume rotation, select .
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 265
Checking the front and around the vehicle
The wide front view & panoramic view screen provides support when checking the areas in front of the vehicle and around the vehicle when taking-off at T-intersections or other intersections during poor visibility. To display the screen, press the camera switch when the shift lever is in the “N” or “D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less. This screen will be displayed if the intuitive parking assist detects an object in front of your vehicle (intuitive parking assist linked display).
Screen display
Wide front view & panoramic view
7 Peripheral moni toring system
A Distance guide lines Shows distance in front of the vehicle. • Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper. B Intuitive parking assist When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. C Estimated course lines Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned. • This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 90° or more from the center (straight-line) position. D Guide line switching button Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode and the esti-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 266 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
mated course line mode. (→P.266) E Automatic display button Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display mode. (→P.267) F Front Cross Traffic Alert* When a sensor detects an approaching vehicle or obstacle, the direction of approaching vehicle or obstacle is displayed. G Pre-Collision System & Parking Support Brake* When the system determines that the possibility of a frontal collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed. *:If equipped
●Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the Side Clearance View & panoramic view screen or previously displayed screen, such as the navigation screen. ●For details about the intuitive parking assist, Front Cross Traffic Alert function and Pre-Collision System & Parking Support Brake function, refer to the “OWNER’S MAN- UAL”.
WARNING ●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unex- pected accident may occur. ●As the intuitive parking assist display and Front Cross Traffic Alert display are displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display and Front Cross Traffic Alert display depending on the color and brightness of the sur- rounding area.
Switching the guide line mode Distance guide line
Each time the guide line switching but- ton is selected, the mode will change as follows:
Only the distance guide lines are displayed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 267
Estimated course line
Estimated course lines will be added to the distance guide lines.
Automatic display mode
In addition to screen switching by operating the camera switch, auto- matic display mode is available. In this mode, the screen is switched automati- cally in response to vehicle speed. 7 In automatic display mode, the monitor will automatically display images in the Peripheral moni following situations: When the shift lever is shifted to “N” or “D” position. When vehicle speed is reduced to toring system approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 268 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Checking the sides of the vehicle
The Side Clearance View & panoramic view screen/Cornering View & pan- oramic view screen provide support to check the areas around the sides of the vehicle when driving on a narrow road. To display the Side Clearance View & panoramic view screen, press the cam- era switch repeatedly when the shift lever is in the “N” or “D” position with the vehicle moving approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less. The Cornering View & panoramic view screen will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 180° or more from the center (straight-line) posi- tion when automatic display mode of the Cornering View display is enabled. When the turning angle of the steering wheel becomes 45° or less from the center position, the screen will return to the Side Clearance View & pan- oramic view screen.
Screen display
Side Clearance View & panoramic view
A Distance guide lines Show distance in front of the vehicle. • Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper. B Front Cross Traffic Alert* When a sensor detects an approaching vehicle or obstacle, the direction of approaching vehicle or obstacle is displayed. C Vehicle width guide lines
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 269
Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mirrors. D Front tire guide lines Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground. E Estimated course lines Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned. • This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 90° or more from the center (straight-line) position. F Guide line switching button Select to change the guide line mode between the distance guide line mode and the esti- mated course line mode. (→P.266) G Automatic display button of Cornering View Select to turn automatic display mode of Cornering View on/off. The indicator on the but- ton illuminates during automatic display mode of Cornering View. (→P.271) H Automatic display button Select to turn automatic display mode on/off. The indicator on the button illuminates during automatic display mode. (→P.270) I Intuitive parking assist 7 When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. Peripheral moni J Pre-Collision System & Parking Support Brake* When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed. *:If equipped toring system Cornering View & panoramic view
A Distance guide lines
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 270 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Show distance in front of the vehicle. • Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper. B Front Cross Traffic Alert* When a sensor detects an approaching vehicle or obstacle, the direction of approaching vehicle or obstacle is displayed. C Vehicle width guide lines Shows guide lines of the vehicle’s width including the outside rear view mirrors. D Front tire guide lines Shows guide lines of where the front tire touches the ground. E Estimated course lines Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned. • This line will be displayed when the steering wheel is turned by 90° or more from the center (straight-line) position. F Intuitive parking assist When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. G Pre-Collision System & Parking Support Brake* When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed. *:If equipped
●Pressing the camera switch changes the screen to the wide front view & panoramic view screen or previously displayed screen, such as the navigation screen. ●For details about the Front Cross Traffic Alert function, intuitive parking assist and Pre-Collision System & Parking Support Brake function, refer to the “OWNER’S MAN- UAL”.
WARNING ●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unex- pected accident may occur. ●As the intuitive parking assist display and Front Cross Traffic Alert display are displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display and Front Cross Traffic Alert display depending on the color and brightness of the sur- rounding area.
Automatic display mode matic display mode is available. In this mode, the screen is switched automati- In addition to screen switching by cally in response to vehicle speed. operating the camera switch, auto-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 271
In automatic display mode, the monitor Using the vehicle width guide line will automatically display images in the following situations: Side Clearance View & panoramic When the shift lever is shifted to “N” view or “D” position. When vehicle speed is reduced to approximately 6 mph (10 km/h) or less.
Automatic display mode of Cor- nering View
When automatic display mode of the Cornering View display is enabled, the screen will change automatically between the Side Clearance View and Cornering View depending on the turning angle of the steering wheel. 7 Each time is selected, automatic display mode of the Cornering View Peripheral moni display is enabled/disabled. Check the positions and distance between the vehicle width guide line In automatic display mode of Corner- and a target object such as the ing View, the monitor will automatically obstacle or curb of the road. display Cornering View images in the toring system following situations: When the shift lever is shifted to “N” or “D” position. When vehicle speed is reduced to approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or less. When the steering wheel is turned by 180° or more from the center (straight-line) position. Cornering View images will disappear when the turning angle of the steering wheel becomes 45° or less from the center (straight-line) position.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 272 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Using the estimated course line
Cornering View & panoramic view
Pull over to the curb as shown in the illustration above, taking care not to let the vehicle width guide line over- lap the target object. Check the positions and distance Ensure that the vehicle width guide between the inner estimated course line is parallel to the target object. line and a target object such as the obstacle or curb of the road. Take care not to let the estimated course line overlap the target object.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 273
Checking the rear and around the vehicle
The rear view & panoramic view/wide rear view & panoramic view screen pro- vide support when checking the areas of behind the vehicle and around the vehicle while backing up, for example while parking. The screens will be displayed when the shift lever is in the “R” position.
Screen display
Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change as follows:
Rear view & panoramic view
7 Peripheral moni toring system
A Intuitive parking assist When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. B Rear Cross Traffic Alert When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed and the buzzer sounds. C Rear Camera Detection Displayed automatically when a pedestrian is detected. D Guide line switching button Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.275) E Rear camera detection function off indicator Displayed when the rear camera detection function is disabled, such as when it is malfunc- tioning.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 274 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
F Display mode switching button Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change between the rear view & panoramic view mode and the wide rear view & panoramic view mode. G Parking Support Brake* When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed. *:If equipped
Wide rear view & panoramic view
A Intuitive parking assist When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of and the approximate distance to the obstacle are displayed and the buzzer sounds. B Rear Cross Traffic Alert When a sensor detects an obstacle, the direction of obstacle is displayed and the buzzer sounds. C Rear Camera Detection Displayed automatically when a pedestrian is detected. D Guide line switching button Select to switch the guide line mode. (→P.275) E Rear camera detection function off indicator Displayed when the rear camera detection function is disabled, such as when it is malfunc- tioning. F Display mode switching button Each time the display mode switching button is selected, the mode will change between the rear view & panoramic view mode and the wide rear view & panoramic view mode. G Parking Support Brake*
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 275
When the system determines that the possibility of a collision with a detected object is high, a warning message is displayed. *:If equipped
●The monitor is cancelled when the shift lever is shifted into any position other than the “R” position. ●For details about the intuitive parking assist, Rear Cross Traffic Alert function, Rear Cam- era Detection and Parking Support Brake function, refer to the “OWNER’S MANUAL”.
WARNING ●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unex- pected accident may occur. ●As the intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert display are displayed over the camera view, it may be difficult to see the intuitive parking assist display and Rear Cross Traffic Alert display depending on the color and brightness of the sur- rounding area.
Guide lines displayed on the screen 7 Each time the guide line switching button is selected, the mode will change as fol- lows: Peripheral moni
Estimated course line Estimated course lines are displayed which move in accordance with the operation of the steering wheel. toring system
A Distance guide lines Shows distance in front of the vehicle. • Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper. B Estimated course lines Shows an estimated course when the steering wheel is turned. C Distance guide lines
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 276 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Shows the distance behind the vehicle when the steering wheel is turned. • The guide lines move in conjunction with the estimated course lines. • The guide lines display points approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red) and approximately 3 ft. (1 m) (yellow) from the center of the edge of the bumper. D Distance guide line Shows the distance behind the vehicle. • Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red*) from the edge of the bumper. E Vehicle width guide lines Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. F Vehicle center guide line Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground. *: In estimated course line mode, the line will turn blue.
Parking assist guide line The steering wheel return points (parking assist guide lines) are displayed. This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the vehi- cle without the aid of the estimated course lines.
A Distance guide lines Shows distance in front of the vehicle. • Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper. B Distance guide line Shows the distance behind the vehicle. • Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red*) from the edge of the bumper. C Vehicle center guide line Indicates the estimated vehicle center on the ground. D Vehicle width guide lines Displays a guide path when the vehicle is being backed straight up. E Parking assist guide lines Shows the path of the smallest turn possible behind the vehicle.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 277
*: In estimated course line mode, the line will turn blue.
Distance guide line Only distance guide line is displayed. This mode is recommended for those who are comfortable with parking the vehi- cle without the aid of the guide lines.
A Distance guide lines Shows distance in front of the vehicle. • Display points approximately 3 ft. (1 m) from the edge of the bumper. B Distance guide line 7 Shows the distance behind the vehicle. Peripheral moni • Displays a point approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) (red*) from the edge of the bumper. *: In estimated course line mode, the line will turn blue.
WARNING
●Depending on the circumstances of the vehicle (number of passengers, amount of lug- toring system gage, etc.), the position of the guide lines displayed on the screen may change. Be sure to check visually around the vehicle before proceeding. ●If the steering wheel is straight and the vehicle width guide lines and the estimated course lines are not in alignment, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. ●Do not use the system if the display is incorrect due to an uneven (hilly) road or a non-straight (curvy) road.
Parking 1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” posi- tion. 2 Turn the steering wheel so that the Using the estimated course line estimated course lines are within When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 278 7-2. Panoramic view monitor the parking space, and back up the left and right dividing lines of slowly. the parking space.
A Parking space A Vehicle width guide line B Estimated course lines 4 Once the vehicle width guide lines and the parking space lines are 3 When the rear position of the vehi- parallel, straighten the steering cle has entered the parking space, wheel and back up slowly until the turn the steering wheel so that the vehicle has completely entered the vehicle width guide lines are within parking space. 5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate place, and finish parking.
Using parking assist guide line When parking in a space which is in the reverse direction to the space described in the procedure below, the steering directions will be reversed. 1 Shift the shift lever to the “R” posi- tion.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 279
2 Back up until the parking assist When folding the outside guide line meets the edge of the rear view mirrors dividing line of the parking space. Even when outside rear view mir- rors are stored, the monitor can dis- play various images of the vicinity of the vehicle and assist the operation in the confirming safe conditions in a narrow places, parking, etc.
Screen display
Wide front view & side views
7
A Parking assist guide line Peripheral moni B Parking space dividing line Rear view & side views 3 Turn the steering wheel all the way to the left, and back up slowly. toring system 4 Once the vehicle is parallel with the parking space, straighten the steer- ing wheel and back up slowly until the vehicle has completely entered the parking space. 5 Stop the vehicle in an appropriate Wide rear view & side views place, and finish parking.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 280 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
●For details about the front view and the Magnifying function rear view: →P.265, 273 If displayed objects are too small to WARNING see clearly when the panoramic ●When a sensor indicator on the intui- view is displayed, the area around tive parking assist display illuminates in the front side or rear side of the red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle can be magnified. vehicle immediately and do not pro- ceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unexpected Magnifying the display accident may occur. 1 Turn the intuitive parking assist on. 2 Select the area on the panoramic view display you wish to magnify.
Selecting one of the 2 areas within the dotted lines will magnify that area. (Dotted lines are not displayed on the actual display.) To return to the normal view, select the panoramic view display again.
●The magnifying function is enabled when all of the following conditions are met: • The wide front view & panoramic view/Side Clearance View & panoramic view/rear view & panoramic view/wide rear view & panoramic view is displayed. • The vehicle speed is below approxi- mately 7 mph (12 km/h). • The intuitive parking assist is available. ●In the following situations, the magnified display will be canceled automatically: • The vehicle speed is approximately 7 mph (12 km/h) or higher. • The intuitive parking assist is unavailable.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 281
●When the display is magnified, the guide lines will not be displayed. Customizing the panoramic view monitor
The color of the vehicle displayed on the panoramic view monitor can be changed.
Changing the body color dis- played in the panoramic view monitor
1 Display the moving view/see-through view screen. (→P.264) 2 Select . 3 Select the desired color. 7 Peripheral moni toring system
A Displays the next page
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 282 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Panoramic view monitor precautions
Area displayed on screen
Area of image of panoramic view
The panoramic view monitor displays an image of the surrounding view of the vehi- cle. Since the panoramic view processes and displays images based on flat road sur- faces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. Even if there is room between the bumpers of the vehicles and it seems not likely to collide in the image, in reality, the both vehicles are on a collision course. Check the safety of the surroundings directly.
A Objects located in the shaded areas will not be displayed on the screen.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 283
A Parts of objects which extend above a certain height cannot be displayed on the screen.
●As the images obtained from four cameras are processed and displayed on the standard of a flat road surface; the panoramic view/moving view/see-through view/Side Clearance View/Cornering View may be displayed as follows. • Objects may look collapsed; thinner or bigger than usual. 7 • An object with a higher position than the road surface may look farther away than it actu- ally is or may not appear at all. • Tall objects may appear protruding from the non-displayed areas of the image. Peripheral moni ●Variations in the brightness of the image may appear for every camera. ●The displayed image may be shifted by inclination of the vehicle body, change in vehicle height, etc., depending on the number of passengers, amount of luggage, fuel quantity, etc. ●The displayed image may be shifted when the vehicle height is set to any height other than toring system normal. ●If the front doors or trunk are not completely closed; neither the image nor the guide lines are displayed. ●The position relations of the vehicle icon and the road surface or obstacle may differ from the actual positions. ●The black areas of the vicinity of the vehicle icon are areas that are not captured by the camera. ●Images like the following are combined, thus some areas may be difficult to view.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 284 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
WARNING ●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unex- pected accident may occur.
Area of the image captured by the Rear view camera
Wide front view
A The area around both corners of the bumper will not be displayed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 285
Wide rear view Front camera
Side cameras
A The area around both corners of 7 the bumper will not be displayed.
Rear camera Peripheral moni ●Black masking is done for distance detection differences to the front of the vehicle. ●The area covered by the camera is lim-
ited. Objects which are close to either toring system corner of the bumper or under the bumper cannot be seen on the screen. ●The area displayed on the screen may vary depending on vehicle orientation or road conditions. ●The camera uses a special lens. The dis- tance in the image displayed on the Using the camera screen will differ from the actual distance. If dirt or foreign matter (such as water The camera droplets, snow, mud, etc.) is adhering to the camera, it cannot transmit a The cameras for the panoramic view clear image. In this case, flush it with a monitor are located as shown in the large quantity of water and wipe the illustrations. camera lens clean with a soft and wet cloth.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 286 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
NOTICE to check visually. ●The panoramic view monitor may not The distances between the vehicle operate properly in the following width guide lines and the left and cases. right dividing lines of the parking • If the camera is hit, the position and space may not be equal, even when mounting angle of the camera may change. they appear to be so. Be sure to check visually. • As the camera has a water proof con- struction, do not detach, disassemble The distance guide lines give a dis- or modify it. This may cause incorrect tance guide for flat road surfaces. In operation. any of the following situations, there • When cleaning the camera lens, flush is a margin of error between the the camera with a large quantity of water and wipe it with a soft and wet guide lines on the screen and the cloth. Strongly rubbing the camera actual distance/course on the road. lens may cause the camera lens to be scratched and unable to transmit a clear image. When the ground behind the vehicle slopes up sharply • Do not allow an organic solvent, car wax, window cleaner or a glass coating to adhere to the camera. If this hap- The distance guide lines will appear to pens, wipe it off as soon as possible. be closer to the vehicle than the actual distance. Because of this, objects will • If the temperature changes rapidly, such as when hot water is poured on appear to be farther away than they the vehicle in cold weather, the system actually are. In the same way, there will may not operate normally. be a margin of error between the • When washing the vehicle, do not guidelines and the actual dis- apply intensive bursts of water to the tance/course on the road. camera or camera area. Doing so may result in the camera malfunctioning. ●Do not expose the camera to strong impacts as this could cause a malfunc- tion. If this happens, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer as soon as possible.
Difference between the screen and the actual road
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines may not actually be parallel with the dividing lines of the parking space, even when they appear to be so. Be sure
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 287
When the ground behind the When any part of the vehicle sags vehicle slopes down sharply 7 When any part of the vehicle sags due
The distance guide lines will appear to to the number of passengers or the dis- Peripheral moni be farther from the vehicle than the tribution of the load, there is a margin actual distance. Because of this, of error between the guide lines on the objects will appear to be closer than screen and the actual distance/course they actually are. In the same way, on the road. there will be a margin of error between toring system the guidelines and the actual dis- tance/course on the road.
A A margin of error
Distortion of three-dimensional objects on the screen
When there are three-dimensional objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) nearby in positions higher than the surface of the road, take extra care when using the fol-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 288 7-2. Panoramic view monitor lowing.
Panoramic view display (including magnified display), Side Clearance View and Cornering View display
Since the panoramic view, Side Clearance View and Cornering View process and display images based on flat road surfaces, it cannot depict the position of three-dimension objects (such as vehicle bumpers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. For example, even though it appears that there is space between the bumpers of the two vehicles in the illustration below and they are not likely to collide, in reality, a collision is about to occur.
WARNING ●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unex- pected accident may occur.
When approaching three-dimensional objects The estimated course lines target flat surfaced objects (such as the road). It is not possible to determine the position of three-dimensional objects (such as vehicles) using the estimated course lines and distance guide lines. When approaching a three-dimensional object that extends outward (such as the flatbed of a truck), be careful of the following.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 289
WARNING ●When a sensor indicator on the intuitive parking assist display illuminates in red or a buzzer sounds continuously, be sure to check the area around the vehicle immediately and do not proceed any further until safety has been ensured, otherwise an unex- pected accident may occur.
Estimated course lines safety of the surroundings directly.
Since the estimated course line is dis- played for a flat road surface, it cannot depict the position of three-dimen- sional objects (such as vehicle bum- pers, etc.) that are in positions higher than the surface of the road. Even if the bumpers of the vehicle is on the out- side of the estimated course line in the image, in reality, the vehicles are on a collision course. 7 Peripheral moni
Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. In the case toring system shown below, the truck appears to be outside of the estimated course lines and the vehicle does not look as if it hits the truck. However, the rear body of the truck may actually cross over the estimated course lines. In reality if you back up as guided by the estimated course lines, the vehicle may hit the truck. A Estimated course line Three-dimensional objects (such as the overhang of a wall or loading platform of a truck) in high positions may not be projected on the screen. Check the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 290 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
A Estimated course lines
Distance guide lines
Visually check the surroundings and the area behind the vehicle. On the screen, it appears that a truck is park- ing at point B . However, in reality if you back up to point A , you will hit the truck. On the screen, it appears that A is closest and C is farthest away. However, in reality, the distance to A and C is the same, and B is farther than A and C .
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 291
Things you should know
If you notice any symptoms If you notice any of the following symptoms, refer to the likely cause and the solu- tion, and re-check. If the symptom is not resolved by the solution, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer.
Symptom Likely cause Solution • The vehicle is in a dark area • The temperature around the lens is either high or Back up while visually check- low ing the vehicle’s surround- • The outside temperature is ings. (Use the monitor again low once conditions have been • There are water droplets improved.) on the camera The image is difficult to see The procedure for adjusting 7 • It is raining or humid the picture quality of the pan-
• Foreign matter (mud, etc.) Peripheral moni oramic view monitor system is adhering to the camera is the same as the procedure • Sunlight or headlights are for adjusting the screen dis- shining directly into the play. (→P.55) camera • The vehicle is under fluo- toring system rescent lights, sodium lights, mercury lights, etc. Dirt or foreign matter (such Flush the camera with a large as water droplets, snow, mud, quantity of water and wipe The image is blurry etc.) is adhering to the cam- the camera lens clean with a era. soft and wet cloth. The camera or surrounding Have the vehicle inspected The image is out of alignment area has received a strong by your Lexus dealer. impact.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 292 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
Symptom Likely cause Solution The camera position is out of Have the vehicle inspected alignment. by your Lexus dealer. • The vehicle is tilted. (There If this happens due to these The guide lines are very far is a heavy load on the vehi- causes, it does not indicate a out of alignment cle, tire pressure is low due malfunction. to a tire puncture, etc.) Back up while visually check- • The vehicle is used on an ing the vehicle’s surround- incline. ings. The estimated course lines There is a malfunction in the Have the vehicle inspected move even though the steer- signals being output by the by your Lexus dealer. ing wheel is straight steering sensor. Close the trunk. If this does not resolve the Guide lines are not displayed The trunk is open. symptom, have the vehicle inspected by your Lexus dealer. • 12-volt battery has been reinstalled. • The steering wheel has been moved while the 12-volt battery was being reinstalled. The estimated course lines Have the vehicle inspected • 12-volt battery power is are not displayed by your Lexus dealer. low. • The steering sensor has been reinstalled. • There is a malfunction in the signals being output by the steering sensor. The panoramic view display cannot be magnified Follow the correction proce- The intuitive parking assist dures for malfunctions of the The See-through view/Mov- may be malfunctioning or intuitive parking assist. (Refer ing view/Side Clearance dirty. View/Cornering View can- to “OWNER’S MANUAL”) not be displayed
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 7-2. Panoramic view monitor 293
Product license
7 Peripheral moni toring system
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 294 7-2. Panoramic view monitor
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 295 Phone 8
8-1.. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) Quick reference...... 296 Some basics...... 297 Placing a call using the Blue- tooth® hands-free system ...... 300 Receiving a call using the Blue- tooth® hands-free system ...... 303 Talking on the Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 304 Bluetooth® phone message func- tion...... 307 8-2. Setup Phone settings...... 312 8 8-3. What to do if... Phone Troubleshooting ...... 321
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 296 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
8-1.Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) Quick reference D Select to display the “Keypad” screen. (→P.303) Phone screen operation E Select to change device if there are more than 1 phone registered. The phone screen can be reached by F Select to display the “Message” the following method: screen. (→P.307) From the steering switch 1 Press switch on the steering Bluetooth® hands-free system wheel. operation From the menu button The following functions can be used on 1 Press the “MENU” button on the phone operation: Remote Touch. Registering/connecting a Bluetooth® device (→P.38) Placing a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system (→P.300) Receiving a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free system (→P.303) ® 2 Select “Phone”. Talking on the Bluetooth hands-free system (→P.304) Phone sub menu screen Message function
The following function can be used on message function: Using the Bluetooth® phone mes- sage function (→P.307)
Setting up a phone
A Select to display the “History” The following functions can be made in screen. (→P.301) the system: B Select to display the “Favorites” Phone settings (→P.312) screen. (→P.301) Bluetooth® settings (→P.42) C Select to display the “Contacts” screen. (→P.301)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 297
Some basics ●Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth® antennas. People with implantable cardiac pacemakers, car- The hands-free system enables diac resynchronization therapy-pace- calls to be made and received with- makers or implantable cardioverter defibrillators should maintain a reason- out having to take your hands off able distance between themselves and the steering wheel. the Bluetooth® antennas. The radio ® waves may affect the operation of such This system supports Bluetooth . devices. Bluetooth® is a wireless data sys- ●Before using Bluetooth® devices, tem that enables cellular phones to users of any electrical medical device be used without being connected other than implantable cardiac pace- by a cable or placed in a cradle. makers, cardiac resynchronization therapy-pacemakers or implantable The operating procedure of the cardioverter defibrillators should con- sult the manufacturer of the device for phone is explained here. information about its operation under the influence of radio waves. Radio ●This system is not guaranteed to operate waves could have unexpected effects ® on the operation of such medical with all Bluetooth devices. devices. ●If your cellular phone does not support Bluetooth®, this system cannot function. NOTICE ●In the following conditions, the system may not function: ●Do not leave your cellular phone in the 8 • The cellular phone is turned off. vehicle. The temperature inside may • The current position is outside the com- rise to a level that could damage the munication area. phone. Phone • The cellular phone is not connected. • The cellular phone has a low battery. ● ® Registering/Connecting a Depending on the type of Bluetooth ® phone, some function is not available. Bluetooth phone ●When using the hands-free system or To use the hands-free system for cellu- Bluetooth® audio and Wi-Fi® Hotspot functions at the same time, the following lar phones, it is necessary to register a problems may occur: cellular phone with the system. • The Bluetooth® connection may be cut. (→P.38) • Noise may be heard on the Bluetooth® audio playback. ■ Connecting a Bluetooth® device • A noise may be heard during phone calls. Registering an additional device WARNING 1 Display the phone screen by either operation: ●While driving, do not operate a cellu- lar phone. switch “MENU” button → “Phone”
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 298 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
2 Select “Select Device” on the sub Using the phone switch/micro- menu. phone 3 Select “Add Device”. ■ Steering switch When another Bluetooth® device is By pressing the phone switch, a call connected, a confirmation screen can be received or ended without tak- will be displayed. To disconnect the ing your hands off the steering wheel. Bluetooth® device, select “Yes”. 4 Follow the steps in “Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the first time” from step 5. (→P.38)
Selecting a registered device 1 Display the phone screen by either operation: switch A Cursor switch “MENU” button → “Phone” • Select and enter the item on the 2 Select “Select Device” on the sub multi-information display. menu. B TEL switch 3 Select the desired device to be • Start talking connected. • End talking • End dialing 4 Check that a confirmation screen is C displayed when the connection is Volume control switch complete. • Press the “+” side to increase the vol- ume. If an error message is displayed, fol- • Press the “-” side to decrease the vol- low the guidance on the screen to ume. try again. D Talk switch ■ Bluetooth® phone condition dis- • Press the talk switch to start the voice command system. play • To cancel voice recognition, press and The condition of the Bluetooth® phone hold the talk switch. appears on the upper right side of the ■ Microphone → screen. ( P.18) The microphone is used when talking on the phone.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 299
The voice command system and its ●The other party’s voice will be heard from the front speakers. The audio/visual sys- list of commands can be operated. tem will be muted during phone calls or (→P.230) when hands-free voice commands are used. ●Talk alternately with the other party on Linking multi-information dis- the phone. If both parties speak at the play same time, the other party may not hear what has been said. (This is not a malfunc- The following phone functions are tion.) linked with the multi-information ●Keep call volume down. Otherwise, the other party’s voice may be audible out- display in the instrument cluster: side the vehicle and voice echo may • Placing a call increase. When talking on the phone, speak clearly towards the microphone. • Receiving a call ●The other party may not hear you clearly etc. 8 when:
• Driving on an unpaved road. (Making Phone excessive traffic noise.) • Driving at high speeds. • The roof or windows are open. • The air conditioning vents are pointed towards the microphone. • The sound of the air conditioning fan is loud. • There is a negative effect on sound qual- ity due to the phone and/or network being used. For details about multi-information dis- NOTICE play control, refer to “OWNER’S ●Do not touch and put a sharp object to MANUAL”. the microphone. It may cause failure. About the contacts in the con- Voice command system tact list
Press this switch to operate the voice The following data is stored for command system. every registered phone. When
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 300 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
another phone is connected, the fol- Placing a call using the lowing registered data cannot be Bluetooth® hands-free system read: •Contact data After a Bluetooth® phone has been • Call history data registered, a call can be made using •Favorites data the hands-free system. There are •Image data several methods by which a call can • All phone settings be made, as described below. • Message settings Calling methods on the ●When a phone’s registration is deleted, ® the above-mentioned data is also Bluetooth phone deleted. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the When selling or disposing of the Remote Touch. vehicle
A lot of personal data is registered when the hands-free system is used. When selling or disposing of the vehi- cle, initialize the data. (→P.56) The following data in the system can be initialized: •Contact data 2 Select “Phone”. • Call history data 3 Select the desired method to call •Favorites data from. •Image data ■ Calling methods from phone • All phone settings screen • Message settings By call history (→P.301) → ●Once initialized, the data and settings will By favorites ( P.301) be erased. Pay much attention when ini- By contacts (→P.301) tializing the data. By keypad*1 (→P.303) By message (→P.310) ■ Also the following lists are avail- able from each function’s screen By POI call*2 (→P.69)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 301 By Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 ●Number-withheld calls are also memo- (→P.338) rized in the system. ●International phone calls may not be By voice command system made depending on the type of (→P.230) Bluetooth® phone you have. *1: The operation cannot be performed ●The list should group together consecu- while driving. tive entries with the same phone number and same call type. For example, two calls *2:With navigation function from John’s mobile would be displayed as follows: John (2) By call history ●By pressing the switch on the steer- ing wheel, a call to the latest history item Up to 30 of the latest call history items can be made. (missed, incoming and outgoing) can be selected from the “History”. By favorites list 1 Display the phone screen by either Calls can be made using registered operation: contacts which can be selected from a switch contact list. (→P.301) “MENU” button → “Phone” 1 Display the phone screen by either operation: 2 Select “History” on the sub menu and select the desired contact. switch If the contact which is not registered “MENU” button → “Phone” 8 on the contact list is selected, the 2 Select “Favorites” on the sub menu Phone name is displayed as “Unknown and select the desired contact. Contact”. In this case, select the 3 Select the desired number. number to make a call properly. 4 Check that the dialing screen is dis- 3 Check that the dialing screen is dis- played. played.
●The icons of call type are displayed. By contacts list : Missed call Calls can be made by using contact : Incoming call data which is transferred from a regis- tered cellular phone. (→P.314) : Outgoing call Up to 5000 contacts (maximum of 4 ●When making a call to the same number phone numbers, e-mail addresses and continuously, only the most recent call is listed in call history. addresses per contact) can be regis- ●When a phone number registered in the tered in the contact list. contact list is received, the name is dis- 1 Display the phone screen by either played. operation:
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 302 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
switch C Select to cancel transferring. “MENU” button → “Phone” 2 Check that a confirmation screen is 2 Select “Contacts” on the sub menu displayed when the operation is and select the desired contact. complete. ■ 3 Select the desired number. For PBAP incompatible but OPP compatible Bluetooth® phones “E-mail Addresses”: Select to display all registered e-mail addresses for the con- 1 Select the desired item. tact. “Addresses”: Select to display all registered addresses for the contact. 4 Check that the dialing screen is dis- played.
When the contact list is empty
■ For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® A Select to transfer the contacts from phones when “Automatic Transfer” the connected cellular phone. is set to on (→P.314) Transfer the contact data to the sys- Contacts are transferred automati- tem using a Bluetooth® phone. cally. B Select to add a new contact manu- ® ■ For PBAP compatible Bluetooth ally. phones when “Automatic Transfer” Follow the steps in “Registering a is set to off (→P.314) new contact to the contacts list” 1 Select the desired item. from step 2. (→P.317) C Select to cancel transferring.
●If your cellular phone is neither PBAP nor OPP compatible, the contacts cannot be transferred using Bluetooth®. But the contacts can be transferred from USB device. (→P.316) ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone: A Select to always transfer all the • It may be necessary to perform additional contacts from a connected cellular steps on the phone when transferring contact data. phone automatically. • The registered image in the contact list B Select to transfer all the contacts may not transfer depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone connected. from a connected cellular phone only once.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 303
By keypad Receiving a call using the Bluetooth® hands-free sys- 1 Display the phone screen by either tem operation: switch When a call is received, the follow- “MENU” button → “Phone” ing screen is displayed with a sound. 2 Select “Keypad” on the sub menu and enter the phone number. Incoming calls
3 Select or press the switch 1 Select “Answer” or press the on the steering wheel. switch on the steering wheel to talk 4 Check that the dialing screen is dis- on the phone.
played. Main display
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be neces- sary to perform additional steps on the phone.
8
Side display Phone
“Decline”: Select to refuse to receive the call. To adjust the volume of a received call: Turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering wheel.
●The contact image picture can be dis- played only when the vehicle is not mov- ing. ●During international phone calls, the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 304 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
other party’s name or number may not be ® displayed correctly depending on the Talking on the Bluetooth type of Bluetooth® phone you have. hands-free system ●The ringtone that has been set in the sound settings screen can be heard when While talking on the phone, the fol- there is an incoming call. Depending on lowing screen is displayed. The the type of Bluetooth® phone, both the operations outlined below can be system and Bluetooth® phone may ring simultaneously when there is an incoming performed on this screen. call. (→P.312) ●The incoming call display mode can be set. (→P.313) Call screen operation
Main display
A Select to display the keypad to send tones. (→P.305) B Select to send tones. This button only appears when a number that contains a (w) is dialed in hands-free mode. (→P.305) C Select to adjust your voice volume that the other party hears from their speaker. (→P.305) D Select to mute your voice to the other party. E Select to mute the Navigation route guidance during a phone call.* F Select to change handset modes between hands-free and cellular phone. G Select to put a call on hold.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 305
To cancel this function, select “Acti- Sending tones vate”. (→P.306) H Select to hang up the phone. ■ By keypad *: With navigation function This operation cannot be performed while driving. Side display 1 Select “0-9” on the sub menu. 2 Enter the desired number. ■ By selecting “Release Tones” “Release Tones” appear when a contin- uous tone signal(s) containing a (w) is registered in the contact list. 1 Select “Release Tones” on the sub A Select to mute your voice to the menu. other party. ●A continuous tone signal is a character B Select to change handset modes string that consists of numbers and the between hands-free and cellular characters “p” or “w”. (e.g. 056133w0123p#1) phone. ●When the “p” pause tone is used, the tone C Select to hang up the phone. data up until the next pause tone will be automatically sent after 2 seconds have D Select to put a call on hold. To can- elapsed. When the “w” pause tone is 8 cel this function, select “Activate”. used, the tone data up until the next
→ pause tone will be automatically sent Phone ( P.306) after a user operation is performed. E Select to switch the displayed cur- ●Release tones can be used when auto- rent screen to the main display. mated operation of a phone based ser- vice such as an answering machine or bank phone service is desired. A phone ●Only when the vehicle is not moving, the number with continuous tone signals can contact image can be displayed. be registered in the contact list. ●When cellular phone call is changed to ●Tone data after a “w” pause tone can be hands-free call, the hands-free screen will operated by voice command during a be displayed and its functions can be call. operated on the screen. ●Changing between cellular phone call and hands-free call can be performed by Transmit volume setting operating the cellular phone directly. 1 Select “Transmit Volume” on the ●Transferring methods and operations will be different depending on the type of cel- sub menu. lular phone you have. 2 Select the desired level for the ●For the operation of the cellular phone, transmit volume. see the manual that comes with it. ●This screen can be displayed on the main display or side display. (→P.313)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 306 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
3 Press the button on the played on the side display. Remote Touch to display previous 1 Select “Answer” or press the screen. switch on the steering wheel to start talking with the other party. ●The sound quality of the voice heard from the other party’s speaker may be nega- To refuse to receive the call: Select tively impacted. “Decline”. ● “Transmit Volume” is dimmed when mute Each time “Swap Calls” is selected, is on. the party who is on hold will be Switching calls while a call is in switched. progress ●This function may not be available ® When there are no calls on hold depending on the type of Bluetooth phone. during a call: “Hold” is displayed. ●This screen can be displayed on the main When selected, the current call is display or side display. placed on hold. When there is no current call, but there is a call on hold: “Activate” is displayed. When selected, the sys- tem switches to the call that was on hold. When there is another call on hold during a call: “Swap Calls” is dis- played. When selected, the current call is placed on hold, and the sys- tem switches to the call that was on hold.
●This function may not be available depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone. ●This screen can be displayed on the main display or side display.
Incoming call waiting
When a call is interrupted by a third party while talking, the incoming screen is displayed. The incoming screen can also be dis-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 307
Bluetooth® phone message the accounts that exist on the cur- function rently connected phone. 5 Check that the message screen is Received messages can be for- displayed. warded from the connected “Phone”: Select to change to phone mode. Bluetooth® phone, enabling The following functions can be used checking and replying using the on message function: system. • Receiving a message (→P.307) • Checking messages (→P.308) Depending on the type of • Replying to a message (dictation ® Bluetooth phone connected, reply) (→P.308) received messages may not be • Replying to a message (quick reply) transferred to the system. (→P.309) If the phone does not support the • Calling the message sender message function, this function (→P.310) cannot be used. Even when the sup- • Message settings (→P.319) ported phone is used, reply function may not be used. Receiving a message
When an e-mail/SMS/MMS is Displaying the message screen received, the incoming message 8 1 Press the “MENU” button on the screen pops up with sound and is ready Remote Touch. to be operated on the screen. Phone
A Select to check the message. 2 Select “Phone”. B Select to not open the message. 3 Select “Message” on the sub menu. C Select to call the message sender. 4 Select a desired account name that is displayed on the left side of ●To display the above screen, it needs to be set to “Full Screen” on “Incoming screen. SMS/MMS Display” and “Incoming Account names are the names of E-mail Display”. (→P.313) Default setting is “Drop-down”.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 308 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones)
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® (→P.308) phone used for receiving messages, or its B registration status with the system, some Select to display the previous or information may not be displayed. next message. ●The pop-up screen is separately available C Select to have messages read out. for incoming e-mail and SMS/MMS messages under the following conditions: To cancel this function, select . E-mail: When “Automatic Message Read- • “E-mail Notification Pop-up” is set to on. out” is set to on, messages will be (→P.313) automatically read out. (→P.319) SMS/MMS: D • “SMS/MMS Notification Pop-up” is set Select to call the message sender. to on. (→P.313) ● ® ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® Depending on the type of Bluetooth phone being connected, E-Mail function phone being connected, this function cannot be used. cannot be used via Bluetooth®. ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being connected, it may be neces- Checking received messages sary to perform additional steps on the phone. 1 Display the massage screen by ●Messages are displayed in the appropri- either operation: ate connected Bluetooth® phone’s regis- → tered mail address folder. Select the switch “Message” desired folder to be displayed. “MENU” button → “Phone” → ●Only received messages on the con- “Message” nected Bluetooth® phone can be dis- played. 2 Select a desired account name that ●The text of the message is not displayed is displayed on the left side of while driving. screen. ●Turn the “PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volume control switch on the steering 3 Select the desired message from wheel to adjust the message read out vol- the list. ume. 4 Check that the message is dis- ●“Subject:” field is not shown on SMS case. played. ●E-mail only: Select “Mark Unread” or “Mark Read” to mark mail unread or read on the message screen. This function is available when “Update Message Read Status on Phone” is set to on. (→P.319)
Replying to a message (dictation reply)
1 Display the massage screen by A Select to reply to the message. either operation:
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 309
switch → “Message” “Message” “MENU” button → “Phone” → 2 Select a desired account name that “Message” is displayed on the left side of screen. 2 Select a desired account name that is displayed on the left side of 3 Select the desired message from screen. the list. 3 Select the desired message from 4 Select “Reply”. the list. 5 Select “Quick Message”. 4 Select “Reply”. 6 Select the desired message. 5 Select “Dictation”. 7 Select “Send”. 6 When the “Say Your Message” “Cancel”: Select to cancel sending the screen is displayed, speak mes- message. sage that you want to send. While the message is being sent, a sending message screen is dis- 7 Select “Send” to send message. played. “Cancel”: Select to cancel sending the message. 8 Check that a confirmation screen is “Retry”: Select to retry speaking message displayed when the operation is that you want to send. complete. While the message is being sent, a If an error message is displayed, fol- 8 sending message screen is dis- low the guidance on the screen to played. try again. Phone 8 Check that a confirmation screen is ■ Editing quick reply messages displayed when the operation is This operation cannot be performed complete. while driving. If an error message is displayed, fol- 1 Select “Reply”. low the guidance on the screen to try again. 2 Select “Quick Message”. 3 Select corresponding to the Replying to a message (quick desired message to edit. reply) 4 Select “OK” when editing is com- pleted. 15 messages have already been stored. 1 Display the massage screen by ●To reset the edited quick reply messages, either operation: select “Default”. ●Quick message 1 (“I am driving and will switch → “Message” arrive in approximately [##] minutes.”)*: “MENU” button → “Phone” → This message cannot be edited and will automatically fill in [##] with the naviga-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 310 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) tion calculated estimated time of arrival ■ Calling from a number within a on the confirm message screen. message If there are waypoints set, [##] to the next waypoint will be shown. Calls can be made to a number identi- If there is no route currently set in the navigation system, quick message 1 can- fied in a message’s text area in blue not be selected. font. ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® This operation cannot be performed phone, reply function is not available. while driving. *: With navigation function 1 Display the massage screen by either operation: Calling the message sender switch → “Message” Calls can be made to an “MENU” button → “Phone” → e-mail/SMS/MMS message sender’s “Message” phone number. 2 Select a desired account name that This operation can be performed while is displayed on the left side of driving. screen. ■ Calling from e-mail/SMS/MMS 3 Select the desired message from message display the list. 1 Display the massage screen by 4 Select the text area. either operation: switch → “Message” “MENU” button → “Phone” → “Message” 2 Select a desired account name that is displayed on the left side of screen. 5 Select the desired number. 3 Select the desired message from the list. 4 Select , or press the switch on the steering wheel. If there are 2 or more phone num- bers, select the desired number. 5 Check that the dialing screen is dis- played. Identified phone numbers contained in the message are displayed.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-1. Phone operation (Hands-free system for cellular phones) 311 6 Check that the dialing screen is dis- played.
●A series of numbers may be recognized as a phone number. Additionally, some phone numbers may not be recognized, such as those for other countries. ■ Calling from the incoming mes- sage screen For detail, refer to “Receiving a mes- sage”. (→P.307)
8 Phone
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 312 8-2. Setup
8-2.Setup * Phone settings : This operation cannot be performed while driving.
Displaying the phone settings Sounds settings screen screen The call and ringtone volume can be 1 Press the “MENU” button on the adjusted. A ringtone can be selected. Remote Touch. 1 Display the phone settings screen: “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Phone” 2 Select “Sounds”. 3 Select the desired item to be set.
2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Phone” on the sub menu. 4 Select the desired item to be set.
Phone settings screen
A Select to set the desired ringtone. B Select “-” or “+” to adjust the ring- ® A Connecting a Bluetooth device tone volume. ® and editing the Bluetooth device C Select “-” or “+” to adjust the default → information ( P.42, 45) volume of the other party’s voice. B * → Sound settings ( P.312) D Select to set the desired incoming C Notification settings* (→P.313) e-mail tone. D Contact/call history settings* E Select to set the desired incoming (→P.314) SMS/MMS tone. E Message settings* (→P.319) F Select “-” or “+” to adjust the
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-2. Setup 313 incoming SMS/MMS tone volume. display. G Select “-” or “+” to adjust the “Side Screen”: Select to display and incoming e-mail tone volume. operate the screen on the side dis- play. For details of the screen: H Select “-” or “+” to adjust the mes- →P.303 sage readout volume. B Select to set the SMS/MMS notifi- I Select to reset all setup items. cation pop-up on/off. C ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® Select to change the incoming phone, certain functions may not be avail- SMS/MMS display. able. “Full Screen”: When an SMS/MMS message is received, the incoming Notifications settings screen SMS/MMS display screen is dis- played and can be operated on the 1 Display the phone settings screen: screen. “MENU” button → “Setup” → “Drop-down”: When an “Phone” SMS/MMS message is received, a 2 Select “Notifications”. message is displayed at the top of the screen. 3 Select the desired item to be set. D Select to set the e-mail notification pop-up on/off. E Select to change the incoming 8 e-mail display. Phone “Full Screen”: When an e-mail is received, the incoming e-mail dis- play screen is the displayed and can be operated on the screen. “Drop-down”: When an e-mail is received, a message is displayed at the top of the screen. F Select to set display of the con- tact/history transfer completion message on/off. G Select to reset all setup items. A Select to change where the screen is displayed between the main dis- ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® play and side display. phone, these functions may not be avail- able. “Main Screen”: Select to display and operate the screen on the main
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 314 8-2. Setup → Contacts/Call history settings ites list. ( P.318) screen E Select to delete contacts from the favorites list. (→P.318) Contacts can be transferred from a F Select to clear the call history.* Bluetooth® phone to this system. Con- G tacts and favorites can be added, Select to add new contacts to the edited and deleted. Also, the call his- contact list.* (→P.317) tory can be deleted. H Select to edit contacts in the con- 1 Display the phone settings screen: tact list.* (→P.317) “MENU” button → “Setup” → I Select to delete contacts from the “Phone” contact list.* (→P.317) 2 Select “Contacts/Call History”. J Select to set the voice tags. 3 Select the desired item to be set. (→P.319) K Select to reset all setup items. *: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® phones, this function is available when “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. (→P.314)
●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone, certain functions may not be avail- able. ●Contact data is managed independently for every registered phone. When one phone is connected, another phone’s registered data cannot be read.
Setting automatic contact/his- tory transfer
A For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® The automatic contact/history function phones: Select to change the con- is available for PBAP compatible tact/history transfer settings. Bluetooth® phones only. (→P.314) 1 Select “Automatic Transfer”. B Select to update contacts from the connected device. (→P.315) C Select to sort contacts by the first name or last name field. D Select to add contacts to the favor-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-2. Setup 315 2 Select the desired item to be set. Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone being con- nected, it may be necessary to per- form additional steps on the phone. ■ Updating the contacts in a differ- ent way (from the call history screen)* 1 Press the “MENU” button on the A Select to set automatic contact/his- Remote Touch. tory transfer on/off. When set to on, 2 Select “Phone”. the phone’s contact data and his- 3 Select “History” on the sub menu tory are automatically transferred. and select a contact not yet regis- B Select to update contacts from the tered in the contact list. → connected phone. ( P.315) 4 Select “Update Contact”. C Select to set the transferred con- 5 Select the desired contact. tact image display on/off. Only when the vehicle is not mov- 6 Select a phone type for the phone ing, the contact image can be dis- number. played. *: For PBAP compatible Bluetooth® D Select to reset all setup items. phones, this function is available when 8 “Automatic Transfer” is set to off. ■ Updating contacts from phone (→P.314) Phone 1 Select “Update Now”. Contacts are transferred automati- Transfer contacts from device cally. 2 Check that a confirmation screen is From phone (OPP compatible displayed when the operation is Bluetooth® phones only) complete. When the contact is not registered This operation may be unnecessary depending on the type of 1 Select “Transfer Contacts from Device”. Bluetooth® phone. 2 Select “From Phone (Bluetooth*)”. If another Bluetooth® device is con- nected when transferring contact *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos data, depending on the phone, the are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. connected Bluetooth® device may need to be disconnected. 3 Transfer the contact data to the sys- tem using a Bluetooth® phone.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 316 8-2. Setup This operation may be unnecessary matted) can be transferred from USB depending on the type of device or Bluetooth® phone to this Bluetooth® phone. system. To cancel this function, select “Can- 1 Push the knob and lift the armrest. cel”. 4 Check that a confirmation screen is displayed when the operation is complete.
When the contact is registered 1 Select “Transfer Contacts from Device”. * 2 Select “From Phone (Bluetooth )”. 2 Open the cover and connect a *: The Bluetooth® word mark and logos device. are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. 3 Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contact”. “Replace Contacts”: Select to transfer the contact from the connected cellular phone and replace the current one. “Add Contact”: Select to transfer the desired contact data from the connected cellular phone to add to the current one. Turn on the power of the USB 4 Transfer the contact data to the sys- ® ® device or Bluetooth phone if it is tem using a Bluetooth phone. not turned on. This operation may be unnecessary 3 Select “Transfer Contacts from depending on the type of Device”. Bluetooth® phone. 4 Select “From USB”. To cancel this function, select “Can- 5 Select “USB 1” or “USB 2” when cel”. the multiple USB devices are con- 5 Check that a confirmation screen is nected. If a USB device is con- displayed when the operation is nected, skip this procedure. complete. 6 Select “Replace Contacts” or “Add Contact”. If the contact is already From USB device registered, skip this procedure. Backed-up contact data (“vCard” for- “Replace Contacts”: Select to transfer the contact from the connected USB device or
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-2. Setup 317
Bluetooth® phone and replace the current ■ Registering a new contact in a dif- one. ferent way (from the call history “Add Contact”: Select to transfer the screen) desired contact data from the connected 1 Press the “MENU” button on the USB device or Bluetooth® phone to add to the current one. Remote Touch. 7 Select a desired file from vCard file 2 Select “Phone”. list. 3 Select “History” on the sub menu 8 Check that a confirmation screen is and select a contact not yet regis- displayed when the operation is tered in the contact list. complete. 4 Select “Add to Contacts”. 5 Follow the steps in “Registering a ●Depending on the type of Bluetooth® phone used and number of files, it may new contact to the contacts list” take time to display vCard file lists and from step 2. (→P.317) download contacts. ●Downloading may not complete cor- rectly in the following cases: Editing the contact data • If the engine switch
contacts list 4 Enter the name or the phone num- Phone ber and select “OK”. New contact data can be registered. Up to 4 numbers per person can be Deleting the contact data registered. 1 Select “Delete Contacts”. 1 Select “New Contact”. 2 Select the desired contact and 2 Enter the name and select “OK”. press the button on the Remote 3 Enter the phone number and select Touch. “OK”. “Select All”: Select all items in the list. 4 Select the phone type for the “Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list. phone number. “Delete”: Delete selected items in the list. 5 To add another number to this con- 3 Select “Delete”. tact, select “Yes”. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
●Multiple data can be selected and
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 318 8-2. Setup deleted at the same time. 2 Select “Phone”. ●When a Bluetooth® phone is deleted, the 3 Select “Contacts” on the sub menu contact data will be deleted at the same time. and select the desired contact. 4 Select “Add Favorite”. Favorites list setting 5 Check that a confirmation screen is Up to 15 contacts (maximum of 4 num- displayed when the operation is bers per contact) can be registered in complete. the favorites list. ■ Deleting the contacts in the favor- ■ Registering the contacts in the ites list favorites list 1 Select “Remove Favorite”. 1 Select “Add Favorite”. 2 Select the desired contacts and 2 Select the desired contact to add to press the button on the Remote the favorites list. Touch. Dimmed contacts are already “Select All”: Select all items in the list. stored as a favorite. “Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list. “Remove”: Remove selected items in the 3 Check that a confirmation screen is list. displayed when the operation is 3 Select “Remove”. complete. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation When 15 contacts have already screen appears. been registered to the favorites list 5 Check that a confirmation screen is 1 When 15 contacts have already displayed when the operation is been registered to the favorites list, complete. a registered contact needs to be replaced. ■ Deleting contacts in the favorites Select “Yes” when the confirmation list in a different way (from the con- screen appears to replace a con- tact details screen) tact. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the 2 Select the contact to be replaced. Remote Touch. 3 Check that a confirmation screen is 2 Select “Phone”. displayed when the operation is 3 Select “Contacts” or “Favorites” on complete. the sub menu and select the ■ Registering contacts in the favor- desired contact to delete. ites list in a different way (from the 4 Select “Remove Favorite”. contact details screen) 5 Select “Yes” when the confirmation 1 Press the “MENU” button on the screen appears. Remote Touch.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-2. Setup 319 6 Check that a confirmation screen is ■ Editing a voice tag displayed when the operation is 1 Select “Edit”. complete. 2 Select the desired contact to edit. 3 Follow the steps in “Registering a Setting voice tags voice tag” from step 3. (→P.319) Calls can be made by saying the voice ■ Deleting the voice tag tag of a registered contact in the con- 1 Select “Delete”. tact list. (→P.230) 2 Select the desired contact and 1 Select “Manage Voice Tags”. press the button on the Remote 2 Select the desired item to be set. Touch. “Select All”: Select all items in the list. “Unselect All”: Unselect all items in the list. “Delete”: Delete selected items in the list. 3 Select “Delete”. 4 Select “Yes” when the confirmation screen appears.
A Select to register a new voice tag. ●Multiple data can be selected and (→P.319) deleted at the same time. ●Voice tags are deleted when the set lan- 8 B Select to edit a voice tag. (→P.319) guage of the system is changed. (→P.53) C Select to delete a voice tag. Phone (→P.319) Message settings screen ■ Registering a voice tag 1 Display the phone settings screen: Up to 50 voice tags can be registered. “MENU” button → “Setup” → 1 Select “New”. “Phone” 2 Select the desired contact to regis- 2 Select “Messaging”. ter a voice tag for. 3 Select the desired item to be set. 3 Select “Rec” and record a voice tag. When recording a voice tag, do so in a quiet area. “Play”: Select to play the voice tag. 4 Select “OK” when voice tag regis- tration is complete. A Select to set automatic message
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 320 8-2. Setup transfer on/off. ■ Editing vehicle signature B Select to set automatic message 1 Select “Edit Vehicle Signature”. readout on/off. 2 Enter desired signature with using C Select to set updating message keyboard. read status on phone on/off. 3 Select “OK”. D Select to set display of messaging 4 Select “OK” on the confirmation account names on the message screen, or select “Edit Again” when screen on/off. it needs to amend. When set to on, messaging account names used on the cellular phone will be displayed. E Select to set adding the vehicle sig- nature to outgoing messages on/off. F Select to reset all setup items.
●Depending on the phone, these functions may not be available.
Vehicle signature settings
1 Select “Vehicle Signature”. 2 Select the desired item to be set.
A Select to set adding the vehicle sig- nature to outgoing messages on/off. B Select to edit the vehicle signature. (→P.320) C Select to reset all setup items.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-3. What to do if... 321
8-3.What to do if... Troubleshooting When registering/connecting a cellular phone If there is a problem with the hands-free system or a Bluetooth® A cellular phone cannot be regis- device, first check the table below. tered. ■ An incorrect passcode was Troubleshooting entered on the cellular phone. Enter the correct passcode on the cel- When using the hands-free sys- lular phone. tem with a Bluetooth® device ■ The registration operation has not been completed on the cellular The hands-free system or phone side. Bluetooth® device does not work. Complete the registration operation on the cellular phone (approve regis- ■ The connected device may not be a tration on the phone). ® compatible Bluetooth cellular ■ Old registration information phone. remains on either this system or the For a list of specific devices which cellular phone. operation has been confirmed on this Delete the existing registration infor- 8 system, check with your Lexus dealer mation from both this system and the
or the following website: cellular phone, then register the cellu- Phone http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink lar phone you wish to connect to this ■ The Bluetooth® version of the con- system. (→P.45) nected cellular phone may be older than the specified version. A Bluetooth® connection cannot be Use a cellular phone with Bluetooth® made. version 2.0 or higher (recommended: ■ Another Bluetooth® device is Ver. 4.1 +EDR or higher). (→P.41) already connected. Manually connect the cellular phone you wish to use to this system. (→P.42) ■ Bluetooth® function is not enabled on the cellular phone. Enable the Bluetooth® function on the cellular phone.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 322 8-3. What to do if...
■ Automatic Bluetooth® connec- ■ Automatic contact transfer func- tion on this system is set to off. tion on this system is set to off. Set automatic contact transfer function Set automatic Bluetooth® connection on this system to on. (→P.314) on this system to on when the engine switch
When making/receiving a call Phonebook data cannot be edited. ■ Automatic contact transfer func- A call cannot be made/received. tion on this system is set to on. Set automatic contact transfer function ■ Your vehicle is in a area. on this system to off. (→P.314) Move to where no longer appears on the display. When using the Bluetooth® mes- sage function When using the phonebook Messages cannot be viewed. Phonebook data cannot be trans- ferred manually/automatically. ■ Message transfer is not enabled on the cellular phone. ■ The profile version of the con- Enable message transfer on the cellu- nected cellular phone may not be lar phone (approve message transfer compatible with transferring on the phone). phonebook data. ■ Automatic transfer function on this For a list of specific devices which system is set to off. operation has been confirmed on this system, check with your Lexus dealer Set automatic transfer function on this or the following website: system to on. (→P.314) http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 8-3. What to do if... 323
New message notifications are not ■ Radio interference has occurred. displayed. Turn off Wi-Fi® devices or other ■ Notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail devices that may emit radio waves. reception on this system is set to ■ The cellular phone is the most likely off. cause of the symptom. Set notification of SMS/MMS/E-mail Turn the cellular phone off, remove and reception on this system to on. reinstall the battery pack, and then (→P.313) restart the cellular phone. ■ Automatic message transfer func- Enable the cellular phone’s Bluetooth® tion is not enabled on the cellular connection. phone. Stop the cellular phone’s security soft- Enable automatic transfer function on ware and close all applications. the cellular phone. Before using an application installed on the cellular phone, carefully check its In other situations source and how its operation might affect this system. The Bluetooth® connection status is ●For details, refer to the owner’s manual displayed at the top of the screen that came with the cellular phone. * each time the system is activated . 8 ■ Connection confirmation display Phone on this system is set to on. To turn off the display, set connection confirmation display on this system to off. (→P.48) *: The engine switch
Even though all conceivable mea- sures have been taken, the symptom status does not change.
■ The cellular phone is not close enough to this system. Bring the cellular phone closer to this system.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 324 8-3. What to do if...
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 325 Lexus Enform 9
9-1.. Lexus Enform overview Functional overview...... 326 Type A: Function achieved by using a smart phone or DCM ...... 327 Type B: Function achieved by using DCM and the system ...... 330 Type C: Function achieved by using DCM...... 331 Type D: Function achieved by using DCM and a smart phone ...... 333 9-2. Lexus Enform operation Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 ...... 335 Lexus Enform Destinations...338 9-3. Setup Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 set- 9 tings...... 340 Lexus Enform
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 326 9-1. Lexus Enform overview
9-1.Lexus Enform overview and Canada. Functional overview • Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 is not avail- able in the United States Virgin Islands. Lexus Enform is a service that • Lexus Enform Destinations is available in the contiguous United States, Washing- includes Safety Connect, Service ton D.C. Puerto Rico, Hawaii, Canada, Connect, Remote, Destinations, and limited areas of Alaska for vehicles ® that contain the appropriate map data. Dynamic Navigation, Wi-Fi • Lexus Enform Destinations is not avail- Hotspot and App Suite. able in the United States Virgin Islands. • Lexus Enform Safety Connect features include: Functional overview Automatic Collision Notification, Emer- gency Assistance, S.O.S, Stolen Vehicle Location (available in the contiguous The functions included in Lexus United States, Washington D.C., Hawaii, Enform are classified into the follow- Alaska, Puerto Rico and Canada) and ing four types. Enhanced Roadside Assistance (avail- able in the contiguous United States, • Type A: Function achieved by using a Washington D.C., Alaska, Puerto Rico smart phone or an embedded cellular and Canada). device in the vehicle (DCM: Data Com- • Lexus Enform Safety Connect is not available in the United States Virgin munication Module) and the system Islands. • Type B: Function achieved by using • Lexus Enform Remote is available in the DCM and the system contiguous United States, Washington D.C. and Alaska. • Type C: Function achieved by using • Lexus Enform Remote is not available in DCM Puerto Rico, Canada, and in the United States Virgin Islands. • Type D: Function achieved by using • Lexus Enform Service Connect is avail- DCM and a smart phone able in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., and Alaska. Function Type • Lexus Enform Service Connect is not available in Puerto Rico, Canada, and the App Suite Type A United States Virgin Islands. Destinations (Destination Assist), Dynamic Naviga- Type B tion, Wi-Fi® Hotspot Safety Connect Type C Remote, Service Connect Type D
●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform service is dependent on network reception level. ●Each function is available in the following areas: •Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 is available in the contiguous United States, Wash- ington D.C., Alaska, Hawaii, Puerto Rico
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9-1. Lexus Enform overview 327
Type A: Function achieved by using a smart phone or DCM
Of the functions included with Lexus Enform, the App Suite relies on the use of a smart phone or DCM. Using a smart phone • App Suite enables applicable apps installed on a smart phone to be displayed on and operated from the screen via a Bluetooth®. • App Suite enables applicable apps installed on the system to be displayed on and operated from the screen. Via DCM • App Suite enables applicable apps installed on the system to be displayed on and operated from the screen. A few settings must be performed before App Suite can be used. (→P.329)
By using a smart phone or DCM
9 Lexus Enform
A Content provider Provides contents to the application server. B Application server Provides applications to the system or a smart phone.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 328 9-1. Lexus Enform overview
C Smart phone* Using the App Suite, communication is relayed between the system, applica- tion server and contents provider. The smart phone can be opened while com- munication, though the phone will display the Enform HS App lock screen. The smart phone cannot be operated while communicating. D Applications Display usable content from the content providers on the screen using the data connection of the connected smart phone or DCM. E System Content received, via a smart phone or DCM, from content provider servers is displayed on the screen. The system is equipped with an application player to run applications. F Via DCM *: For known compatible phones, refer to http://www.lexus.com/MobileLink.
cations and connect a smart phone to the Before using the function system, and the registration steps for the App Suite are explained in this section. ■ Subscription For details regarding operation of the App Suite and the applications, refer to App Suite does not require an acti- http://www.lexus.com/enform/. vation fee or monthly recurring fees. ●Availability of functions of the Lexus Services requiring a separate con- Enform service is dependent on network reception level. tract can also be used.* ■ *: For details, refer to Initializing personal data http://www.lexus.com/enform/ or call The personal data used in applications 1-800-255-3987. can be reset. (→P.56) ■ Availability of function The following personal data can be Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 is avail- deleted and returned to their default able in the contiguous United settings: States, Washington D.C., Alaska, • Downloaded contents Hawaii, Puerto Rico and Canada. • Radio stations that were listened to Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 is not available in the United States Virgin ●Once initialized, the data and settings will be erased. Pay much attention when ini- Islands. tializing the data.
●Data usage fees may apply while using App Suite function. Confirm data usage fees before using this function. ●The required operations to activate appli-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9-1. Lexus Enform overview 329
Preparation before using Lexus tem, and the application is running. ●App Suite operational procedures can Enform App Suite 2.0 also be confirmed by visiting http://www.lexus.com/enform/. ■ Settings required to use Lexus ●If a App Suite application is used while Enform App Suite 2.0 iPod audio/video is being played back, Perform the settings in the following system operation may become unstable. order. 1 Download the App Suite applica- tion to your smart phone or the sys- tem. 2 Register the smart phone with the system. In order to use App Suite, the following must first be performed: Download the App Suite application onto your smart phone or the sys- tem, and login to the application. (→P.329) Register the smart phone, on which the App Suite application was installed, with the system. (→P.329) Register a Bluetooth® phone with the hands-free system. (→P.38) 9 ■ Registering the Lexus Enform App Lexus Enform Suite 2.0 application Registration is optional. 1 Download the App Suite applica- tion to your smart phone or the sys- tem. 2 Run the App Suite application on your smart phone or the system. 3 Enter the information required into the App Suite application. Login to the application.
●Applications can only be used when the App Suite application has been down- loaded to your smart phone or the sys-
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 330 9-1. Lexus Enform overview
Type B: Function achieved by using DCM and the system
The functionality of Lexus Enform Destinations, Dynamic Navigation, and Wi-Fi® Hotspot is made possible through the shared work of the DCM and the system. These are subscription-based telematics services that use Global Positioning System (GPS) data and embedded cellular technology to provide safety and security as well as convenience features. These services are available by subscription on select, telematics hard- ware-equipped vehicles and supported by Lexus’ designated response cen- ter, which operates 24 hours a day, 7 days a week. For details about: Dynamic Navigation :→P.73, 82, 104 Wi-Fi® Hotspot :→P.49
Before using the function ■ Subscription After you have signed the Telematics Subscription Service Agreement and are enrolled, you can begin receiving services. A variety of subscription terms are available. Contact your Lexus dealer, or call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) in the Unites States (1-800-26-LEXUS in Canada) (1-877-539-8777 in Puerto Rico), for further subscription details. (→P.328)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9-1. Lexus Enform overview 331
●These standards are based on compre- Type C: Function achieved by hensive and periodic evaluations of the using DCM relevant scientific literature. Over 120 scientists, engineers, and physicians from universities, government health agen- The functionality of Lexus Enform cies, and industry reviewed the available Safety Connect is made possible by body of research to develop the ANSI the use of a DCM. Standard (C95.1). ●The design of Lexus Enform system com- For details, refer to “OWNER’S plies with the FCC guidelines in addition MANUAL”. to those standards. ●Contact with the Lexus response center is dependent upon the telematics device ●Free/Open Source Software Information being in operative condition, cellular con- This product contains Free/Open Source nection availability, navigation map data, Software (FOSS). and GPS satellite signal reception, which The license information and/or the can limit the ability to reach the response source code of such FOSS can be found center or receive support. Enrollment at the following URL. and Telematics Subscription Service https://www.denso.com/global/en/ Agreement required. A variety of sub- opensource/dcm/toyota/ scription terms are available; charges ●Exposure to radio frequency signals: vary by subscription term selected. The Lexus Enform system installed in ●The Lexus response center offers sup- your vehicle includes a low power radio port in multiple languages. transmitter and receiver. The system ● receives and also sends out radio fre- Select Lexus Enform Safety Con- quency (RF) signals. nect-subscribed vehicles are capable of communicating vehicle information. ●In August 1996, the Federal Communi- Please see the terms and conditions for cations Commission (FCC) adopted RF additional details. exposure guidelines with safety levels for Owners who do not wish to have their mobile wireless phones. Those guidelines vehicle transmit this information can opt 9 are consistent with the safety standards out at the time of enrollment or by calling previously set by both U.S. and interna- 1-800-255-3987 and following the tional standards bodies. prompts for Lexus Enform Safety Con- Lexus Enform • ANSI (American National Standards nect. Institute) C95.1 [1992] ● • NCRP (National Council on Radiation For further details about the service, con- Protection and Measurement) Report tact your Lexus dealer. 86 [1986] ●Lexus Enform functions are not subject to • ICNIRP (International Commission on section 255 of the Telecommunications Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection) Act and the system is not TTY compati- [1996] ble. ●Certification
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 332 9-1. Lexus Enform overview
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Canada and Puerto Rico
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9-1. Lexus Enform overview 333
Type D: Function achieved by Washington D.C. and Alaska. using DCM and a smart Lexus Enform Remote is not avail- phone able in Puerto Rico, Canada, and in the United States Virgin Islands. The functionality of Lexus Enform ●Availability of functions of the Lexus Remote and Lexus Enform Service Enform Remote is dependent on network Connect are made possible by the reception level. use of a DCM and a smart phone. WARNING For details about these services, refer to ●Operating Lexus Enform Remote incorrectly may lead to unforeseen http://www.lexus.com/enform/. accidents or malfunctions. Check the vehicle condition and assume full responsibility before using. Lexus Enform Remote
Lexus Enform Remote is a smart phone ●Lexus Enform Remote should only be application that lets you view and used by authorized users. remotely control certain aspects of ●Laws in some communities may require that the vehicle be within view of the user your vehicle. when operating Lexus Enform Remote. ■ In some states, use of Lexus Enform Subscription Remote may violate state or local laws. After you sign the Telematics Sub- Before using Lexus Enform Remote, check your state and local laws. scription Service Agreement (see ●Any malfunction of the vehicle should be the Lexus Enform Safety Connect repaired by your Lexus dealer. section in “OWNER’S MANUAL”), ●Lexus Enform Remote is designed to 9 download the Lexus Enform work at temperatures above approxi- Remote app from your smart mately -22 °F (-30 °C). This specifica- Lexus Enform tion is related to the Lexus Enform phone’s app store, and register Remote operation, but is dependent on within the app (or enroll and com- the vehicle’s operating temperature plete registration at the dealer), you range which may be different. can begin using these services. ●Content is subject to change without notice. A variety of subscription terms are ●Additional information can be found at available. Contact your Lexus www.lexus.com/enform/. dealer, or call 1-800-25-LEXUS (1-800-255-3987) for further sub- Lexus Enform Service Connect scription details. Lexus Enform Service Connect uses ■ Availability of function DCM to collect and transmit vehicle Lexus Enform Remote is available in data that allows Lexus to provide: the contiguous United States, Vehicle Health Report (VHR)
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 334 9-1. Lexus Enform overview (Safety Recalls, Service Campaigns, Current Vehicle Alerts, Required Maintenance, and Vehicle Condi- tion Status) Maintenance Notifications Vehicle Alert Notifications ■ Availability of function Lexus Enform Service Connect is available in the contiguous United States, Washington D.C., and Alaska. Lexus Enform Service Connect is not available in Puerto Rico, Can- ada, and the United States Virgin Islands.
●Availability of functions of the Lexus Enform Service Connect is dependent on network reception level.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9-2. Lexus Enform operation 335
9-2.Lexus Enform operation Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 Updating an application When the App Suite is activated, an App Suite is a function that enables application may need to be updated. certain apps installed on a smart To update an application, it is neces- phone or the system to be displayed sary to download update data and on and operated from the system install it. screen. Before the Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 can be used, some ■ Downloading update setup needs to be performed. If an update is available, “Update” can (→P.329) be selected. For details about the functions and 1 Press the “MENU” button on the services provided by each applica- Remote Touch. tion, refer to 2 Select “Apps”. http://www.lexus.com/enform/. 3 Select “Update”. 4 Check that downloading starts. Using Lexus Enform App Suite “Download in Background”: Select to 2.0 operate other functions while download- ing. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the “Cancel”: Select to cancel updating. Remote Touch. 5 Check that downloading is com- plete. “Later”: Select to install later. When this screen button is selected, the screen will 9 return to the last displayed screen. To install the update data: (→P.335) Lexus Enform “See Detail”: Select to display detailed information on the update data. “Install”: Select to install the update data. Follow the steps “Installing the update data” from step 4. (→P.335) 2 Select “Apps”. ■ Installing the update data 3 Select the desired application After the downloading is complete, screen button. “Update” will be changed to “Install”. : Select to activate an application. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the “Update”: Select to update the applica- Remote Touch. tions. (→P.335) 2 Select “Apps”. “App Catalog”: Select to change the order of the applications. (→P.336) 3 Select “Install”. : Displays the number of new notifica- 4 Select “Continue”. tions for the application
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 336 9-2. Lexus Enform operation
“Later”: Select to postpone the installation tion cannot be connected to Bluetooth® of the update data and go back to the pre- SPP. vious screen. 5 Check that installing is started. Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ to confirm if the phone is Bluetooth® SPP “Install in Background”: Select to operate other functions while installing. compatible or not, and then activate the App Suite application. 6 Select “OK” after the installing is complete. “Installation failed, please try again” Installation can be attempted again by ●The App Suite function cannot be oper- changing to the application screen and ated while installing. pressing the “Install” switch. “Application download error. Please Reordering the applications try again later.” Order of the applications can be Downloading can be attempted again by changed. checking the communication status, 1 Press the “MENU” button on the changing to the application screen and pressing the “Download” switch again. Remote Touch. “Download error, some Enform App 2 Select “Apps”. Suite functions may not work as 3 Select “App Catalog”. expected. Please reinitiate the 4 Select the desired application to be download process.” moved. The Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 applica- ® 5 Select or to move the appli- tion cannot be connected to Bluetooth SPP. cation, and then select the done button. Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ to confirm if the phone is Bluetooth® SPP compatible or not, and then activate the If a message appears on the App Suite application. screen Please ensure your Enform App Suite When problems occur with starting the application is running and logged in on application player, a message will your phone while vehicle is not moving. appear on the screen. Referring to the “To use the services, Enform App table below, identify the problem and Suite 2.0 application needs to be take the suggested corrective action. running on your phone. For more “When it is safe and legal to do so, information, please visit lexus.com please ensure your Enform App or call 1-800-255-3987.” Suite application is running and The Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 applica- logged in on your phone.” tion cannot be connected to Bluetooth® The Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 applica- SPP.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9-2. Lexus Enform operation 337
Refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/ to Entering a keyword using the ® confirm if the phone is Bluetooth SPP voice recognition function compatible or not, and then activate the App Suite application. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the “Communication unsuccessful. Remote Touch. Please try again.” 2 Select “Apps”. Communication was disconnected. 3 Select the desired application After a few moments, retry the operation. screen button. 4 Press the talk switch. (→P.230) Entering keyword operation 5 Say the desired keyword. A keyword can be entered to an appli- Completion of the keyword will be cation by the software keyboard or detected automatically. voice recognition function. For details 6 Search results will be displayed on about the functions and services pro- the screen. vided by each application, refer to http://www.lexus.com/enform/. The keyboard layout can be changed. (→P.53)
Entering a keyword using the software keyboard
1 Press the “MENU” button on the 9 Remote Touch.
2 Select “Apps”. Lexus Enform 3 Select the desired application screen button. 4 Select the character entering space. 5 Enter a search term, and then select “OK”. 6 Entering characters will be reflected on the character entering space. For details on operating the key- board: →P.34
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 338 9-2. Lexus Enform operation
Lexus Enform Destinations ■ From the menu screen 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Destination Assist Remote Touch.
Destinations provide you with live assistance for finding destinations via the Lexus response center. You can request either a specific business, address, or ask for help locating your desired destination by category, such as restaurants, gas stations, shopping centers or other Points of Interest (POI). 2 Select “Destination”. After you tell the agent your choice of 3 Select “Dest Assist”. destination, its coordinates are sent 4 When an agent comes on the line, wirelessly to your vehicle’s navigation tell the agent the address, business system. name, or the type of POI or service. To adjust the call volume, select “-” ●The hands-free system cannot be used while Destination Assist is being used. or “+”, or use the volume switch on the steering wheel during the call. Make a call with Destination To hang up the phone, select “End” Assist or press the switch on the steer- ■ From the map screen ing wheel. 1 Press the “MAP” button on the 5 After the agent helps you deter- Remote Touch. mine your location of choice, this screen is displayed. Select the screen button of the desired action.
2 Select . A Select to register as a memory 3 Follow the steps in “From the menu point. screen” from step 3. (→P.338) B Select to set as a destination.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 9-2. Lexus Enform operation 339
C Select to call the registered num- ber.
9 Lexus Enform
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 340 9-3. Setup
9-3.Setup Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 B Select to detect iPhone app auto- settings matically on/off. C Select to set the enhanced mode The settings of App Suite can be with connecting USB device on/off. changed. This function cannot be used on this vehicle. Displaying the Lexus Enform D Select to configure the Enform App Suite 2.0 settings screen Apps menu layout (e.g. app order, which applications are activated, 1 Press the “MENU” button on the etc.). This updates a setting file Remote Touch. stored on the Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 Server, this settings file can also be updated from the navi- gation system, smartphone app and by web portal. By pressing the button on the Remote Touch, following buttons can be displayed. “Default”: Select to reset all setup items. 2 Select “Setup”. “App Suite USB Install”: Select to install the 3 Select “Enform App Suite” on the Apps via a USB memory device. For sub menu. details, contact your Lexus dealer. 4 Select the desired items to be set. Data use notification pop-up set- tings Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 set- tings screen The data use notification pop-up, which indicates that the system will use an internet connection, can be enabled/disabled. 1 Press the “MENU” button on the Remote Touch. 2 Select “Setup”. 3 Select “Enform App Suite” on the sub menu. A Select to set the pop up reminder 4 Select “Data Usage Message”. for smart phone data usage. (→P.340) 5 Change the setting as desired.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 341 Index
. Alphabetical Index...... 342
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 342 Alphabetical Index Alphabetical Index
® A Bluetooth audio...... 129 Connecting a Bluetooth® device...... 131 A/V input port (HDMI) (rear seat enter- Sub menu...... 132 tainment)...... 165 Bluetooth® audio (rear seat entertain- AM...... 112 ment)...... 184 AM (rear seat entertainment)...... 167 Bluetooth® button (Setup screen) ...... 20 Apps button (Menu screen) ...... 16 Bluetooth® details settings ...... 42 Audio...... 106 Bluetooth® setup screen...... 42 Audio source...... 107 Connecting a Bluetooth® device...... 42 Disc slot...... 108 Deleting a Bluetooth® device ...... 45 Operating information...... 145 Detailed settings screen...... 46 Reordering the audio source...... 108 Displaying the Bluetooth® setup screen Screen adjustment...... 110 ...... 42 Some basics...... 107 Editing the Bluetooth® device informa- Sound settings...... 109 tion ...... 45 Turning the system on and off...... 107 Registering a Bluetooth® device...... 44 USB/AUX port...... 108 Bluetooth® device information...... 45 Voice command system...... 111 Bluetooth® hands-free system...... 296 Audio (rear seat entertainment)...... 158 Bluetooth® phone message function.307 A/V input port (HDMI)...... 165 Calling the message sender ...... 310 Audio source...... 162 Checking received messages ...... 308 Disc slot...... 164 Displaying the message screen...... 307 HDMI (A/V input port)...... 165 Receiving a message...... 307 Operating information...... 198 Replying to a message (dictation reply) SD card slot...... 164 ...... 308 Some basics...... 160 Replying to a message (quick reply)309 Turning the system on and off...... 160 Blu-ray Disc™ (rear seat entertainment) Audio button (Setup screen)...... 20 ...... 176 Audio settings...... 139 BDAV options ...... 179 Common settings...... 139 BD-Video options ...... 177 DVD settings...... 140 Language codes list...... 141 C Radio settings...... 139 Audio source...... 107 CD...... 121 Audio source (rear seat entertainment) Sub menu...... 122 ...... 162 CD (rear seat entertainment) ...... 168 AUX...... 132 Climate button (Menu screen)...... 16 Sub menu...... 133 Command list...... 233
B D Back button (Remote Touch)...... 14, 27 Data service button (Setup screen)...... 20 Basic operation ...... 62 Data services settings...... 244
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) Alphabetical Index 343
DCM...... 330, 331, 333 F Destination Assist...... 338 Destination button (Menu screen)...... 16 FM...... 112 Destination search...... 72 FM (rear seat entertainment)...... 167 Destination search operation Address...... 75 G Contact...... 74 General button (Setup screen)...... 20, 53 Destination Assist...... 74 General settings ...... 53 Emergency ...... 74 Displaying the general settings screen Favorite list...... 73 ...... 53 Home...... 24, 73 General settings screen...... 53 Keyword...... 73 GPS (Global Positioning System) ...... 102 One-touch setting home/favorite ...... 78 Guiding the route...... 23 Point of interest...... 76 Deleting destinations...... 23 Recent destinations ...... 74 Search area ...... 72 H Detailed navigation settings...... 89, 94 Disc slot ...... 108 Hands-free system...... 296 Disc slot (rear seat entertainment) ...... 164 HDMI (A/V input port) (rear seat enter- Display and operation switches...... 12 tainment)...... 165 Names of each part ...... 12 How to use the Remote Touch...... 27 DVD...... 123 Touchpad gestures...... 28 DVD options ...... 124 Touchpad operation ...... 27 Sub menu...... 124 DVD (rear seat entertainment)...... 171 I AVCHD™ video options...... 175 DVD video options...... 171 Info button (Menu screen)...... 16, 21 Information screen...... 21 E Initial screen...... 26 Caution screen ...... 26 ECO button (Information screen)...... 21 Maintenance information...... 26 Editing route...... 87 Restarting the system...... 26 Enform App Suite button (Setup screen) Internet radio...... 120 ...... 20 iPod ...... 127 Entering letters and numbers/list screen Sub menu...... 129 operation ...... 34 iPod (rear seat entertainment) ...... 183 Entering letters and numbers...... 34 List screen ...... 35 eOwner’s Manual button (Information screen)...... 21 External devices (rear seat entertainment) ...... 190
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 344 Alphabetical Index
L Map screen overview...... 62 MEDIA button...... 106, 107 Lexus Enform...... 326 Media button (Menu screen)...... 16 Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0...... 335 Memory points settings ...... 89 Entering keyword...... 337 Areas to avoid...... 92 Lexus Enform App Suite 2.0 settings.340 Favorites list ...... 90 Lexus Enform center...... 82 Home...... 89 Lexus Enform Destinations ...... 338 MENU button (Remote Touch)...... 14, 16 Lexus Enform Remote...... 333 Menu screen ...... 16 Lexus Enform Service Connect...... 333 Menu screen operation...... 16 Lexus parking assist monitor...... 246 Microphone...... 298 Camera ...... 252 Mobile Assistant ...... 238 Differences between the screen and the Connectable devices and available func- actual road...... 253 tions ...... 238 Distance guide line display mode...... 251 Mobile Assistant operation...... 238 Driving precautions...... 246 Estimated course line display mode 249 N Parking assist guide line display mode ...... 250 Natural language understanding...... 233 Precautions...... 252 Navigation...... 62 Things you should know...... 256 Navigation button (Setup screen)...... 20 Using the system...... 248 When approaching three-dimensional O objects...... 254 Operating the screen...... 30 Linking multi-information display and the Names and operations of each part...30 system ...... 37 P M Panoramic view monitor ...... 258 MAP button (Remote Touch).... 14, 62, 64 Body color changing...... 281 Map database...... 104 Camera...... 285 Temporary updates of the map ...... 104 Camera switch...... 260 Map screen information...... 67 Checking around the vehicle...... 264 Map icons...... 69 Checking the front and around the vehi- Map options screen...... 67 cle ...... 265 Switching the map mode on the side dis- Checking the rear and around the vehi- play ...... 68 cle ...... 273 Map screen operation...... 22, 64 Checking the sides of the vehicle .... 268 Adjusting location ...... 66 Customize...... 281 Current position display ...... 22, 64 Difference between the screen and the Map scale...... 22, 64 actual road...... 286 Orientation of the map...... 65 Display...... 260 Scrolling the map...... 22, 65
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) Alphabetical Index 345
Display switching...... 261 Displaying the radio ID...... 118 Distortion of three-dimensional objects How to subscribe to SiriusXM Satellite on the screen...... 287 Radio...... 116 Driving precautions...... 258 If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions118 Magnifying function...... 280 Presetting a station...... 112 Parking...... 277 Radio broadcast data system...... 114 Precautions...... 282 Smart favorites...... 118 Things you should know...... 291 Sub menu...... 113 When approaching three-dimensional Troubleshooting guide...... 116 objects...... 288 Radio (rear seat entertainment)...... 167 When folding the outside rear view mir- RADIO button...... 106, 107 rors ...... 279 Radio button (Menu screen) ...... 16 Phone ...... 296 Rear Multi Operation Panel...... 135 About the contacts in the contact list299 Rear seat entertainment system Linking multi-information display...... 299 Function index...... 158 Phone screen operation...... 296 Overview...... 159 Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® Rear seat entertainment system features phone...... 297 ...... 158 Some basics...... 297 Rear seat entertainment system settings Troubleshooting...... 321 ...... 195 Voice command system...... 299 Rear-DLNA (rear seat entertainment)190 When selling or disposing of the vehicle Video options...... 193 ...... 300 Rear-Miracast™ (rear seat entertainment) Phone button...... 296 ...... 193 Phone button (Menu screen)...... 16 Receiving a call using the Bluetooth® Phone button (Setup screen)...... 20 hands-free system...... 303 Phone settings ...... 312 Registering home...... 24 Contacts/Call history settings...... 314 Registering/Connecting a Bluetooth® Message settings...... 319 device...... 38 Notifications settings...... 313 Profiles...... 41 Sounds settings...... 312 Registering a Bluetooth® audio player Placing a call using the Bluetooth® for the first time...... 40 hands-free system...... 300 Registering a Bluetooth® phone for the By call history...... 301 first time ...... 38 By contacts list ...... 301 Remote Touch...... 14 By favorites list ...... 301 Names and operations of each part.....14 By keypad...... 303 Route guidance...... 79, 83 PWR/VOL knob...... 107 Route guidance screen...... 83 Freeway ...... 84 R Intersection...... 85 Turn list screen...... 86 Radio...... 112 Turn-by-turn arrow screen...... 86 Available HD Radio™ technology...... 115
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 346 Alphabetical Index
Route overview ...... 80 Touchpad (Remote Touch)...... 14, 27 Traffic button (Setup screen)...... 20 S Traffic incidents button (Information screen)...... 21 SD card (rear seat entertainment)...... 185 Traffic information...... 70 Music ...... 185 Traffic settings...... 97 Picture ...... 186 TUNE knob Selecting the SD mode...... 185 Bluetooth® audio...... 130 Video/AVCHD™/Movie...... 187 CD...... 122 SD card slot (rear seat entertainment).164 DVD...... 123 SEEK/TRACK button ® iPod...... 128 Bluetooth audio...... 130 Radio...... 112 CD ...... 122 USB memory...... 126 DVD...... 123 iPod...... 128 U Radio...... 112 USB memory...... 126 USB memory...... 125 Setup button (Menu screen) ...... 16, 20 Sub menu...... 127 Setup screen...... 20 USB memory (rear seat entertainment)181 SiriusXM (SXM)...... 112 USB video options...... 182 SiriusXM (SXM) (rear seat entertainment) USB/AUX port...... 108 ...... 167 Use of information accumulated by navi- Status icon ...... 18 gation system ...... 101 Status icon explanation...... 18 Using side display...... 32 Steering switch Switching the side display...... 32 Audio switch ...... 134 Talk switch...... 230 V Sub function button (Remote Touch)14, 15 SXM (SiriusXM)...... 112 Vehicle alert history button (Information SXM (SiriusXM) (rear seat entertainment) screen)...... 21 ...... 167 Vehicle button (Setup screen)...... 20, 58 Vehicle settings...... 58 T Displaying the vehicle settings screen58 Maintenance...... 58 Talking on the Bluetooth® hands-free sys- Valet mode setting...... 60 tem...... 304 Vehicle settings screen...... 58 Call screen operation...... 304 Video CD (rear seat entertainment) ....169 Incoming call waiting...... 306 Video CD options ...... 170 Sending tones...... 305 Voice button (Setup screen)...... 20, 57 Transmit volume setting...... 305 Voice command system...... 230 Things you should know Using the voice command system ...230 If you notice any symptoms...... 256 Voice command system operation..230 Tips for the navigation system...... 102 Voice guidance prompts...... 86
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) Alphabetical Index 347
Voice settings ...... 57 Displaying the voice settings screen .. 57 Voice settings screen...... 57
W
Weather ...... 242 Weather button (Information screen).....21 Wi-Fi® ...... 49 Connecting a device to the in-vehicle access point...... 49 Operating hints ...... 52 Wi-Fi® Hotspot ...... 49
?
For more information about the following items, see the “OWNER’S MANUAL”. · Air conditioning · Energy monitor (LS500h) · Fuel consumption · Drive Mode customization · Lexus Safety System
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 348
Map database information and updates
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 349
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 350
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 351
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 352
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 353
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 354
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 355 Certain business data provided by Infogroup © 2016, All Rights Reserved.
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 356
Certification
For vehicles sold in the U.S.A., Hawaii and Puerto Rico
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 357
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 358
For vehicles sold in Canada
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 359
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 360
Gracenote, the Gracenote logo and logotype, “Powered by Gracenote”, Musi- cID, Playlist Plus and MediaVOCS are either registered trademarks or trade- marks of Gracenote, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 361
For U.S. owners
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U) 362
For vehicles sold in Canada
LS500_LS500h_Navi_OM50F66U_(U)